Home

Garmin Non_Airframe Specific Pilot's Guide

1. eene 6 1 GAGNE 6 1 Gd IE SUAS MNETR M 6 10 E SYMONS ctn 7 1 amp 7 1 Map Page Symbols 7 1 72 SafeTaxi M Symbols sss 7 2 To MANIC DO er e E E E E eerie 7 2 XIV Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 7 4 Terrain Obstacle VID ON Sicusctseusexaseestsctacnseeebepastsctisaestccbegesteatsoessueaeeesteet Lo Baseman SUmDDIS assueti serene ore ges SERUUM eas UN UN CENE M ONES 1 5 Map ToolBar S DOS uestem tini ciui it etii ona icto or RUP eei 7 1 XM Weather Tool Bar Symbols 7 8 Miscellaneous SUDO Se uses eieuEt onte eipsansertees Oda tu actu IRE esI tran OEE Mc nM 8 15 5 PR SINC Fis e M SD Card Use and DIS Iz S SERE EET EE TETTE A 1 JeppesenDataDdses es sese teres estere eet rene esa n cre Des ber cs A 2 3 Updating the Jeppesen Database A 2 AGAIN BS MS e RII A 4 Updating GarrmitriDataDdS OS ccisseriestussr bris ened ittp ist wan ERtr vtri os Pen nno WM B 1 su jy 8 unuuv 9 29 y xipueddy Alesso 5 sioquu S 8 29 L 28 Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide XV GARMIN piomao4 UJa1s g 29 ddd C 29 HIA 298 e2UepIOAV piezeH V 295 This page intentionally left blank saunjea PUOI pp G 29 SHY 8 Uhuuy 9 295 S OQWAS 298 leSso D 8 29S y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F
2. eere EE vid C cT 2 2 Airspeed Indicator nnne nnne 2 2 1 JUSTE ARIS CRI ENTRE 237 Rerereince Spee uses trien pestes tiers eiue Be eu rime ad 2 3 JAEPIT UO SCTBICIIC lO Toon RUD ERG ne ee eee eer terete ter ree ere er rte te eee 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide Vii A GARMIN 2 3 1 Rieme AUUE M NEN 2 10 W AE O UEM 2 12 2 4 1 Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter ssss 2 12 2 4 2 Altitude Alerting 2 13 2 4 3 Changing Barometric Setting esses 2 14 pi 2 4 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting 2 14 2 5 Vertical Speed V S Indicator 2 17 2 6 Horizontal Situational AdlCabOT secet se erotic nh Fe eror 2 18 2 6 1 Setting the Heading Bug 2 19 2 6 2 Turn Rate WNC ueesconeske et cue seo oC Ue roe ee on ene o ES RIO 2 20 2 7 Course Deviation Indicator secs usse ve vetu Ee pa h Ye ERSEEEN xk Per etuc EUER Exe 2 20 2 7 1 Changing CDI SOURCES TN ns 2 21 2 7 2 Changing CD NC GIS NONE 2 22 2 7 3 Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI seee 2 23 a 2 7 4 PUTO SN jo E pemend E T 2 24 g RS 2 8 Supplemental Flight Data seen 2 26 BE 2 8 1 Bearing POIDIOISs casus i scene sette ueteres eiectus uetus cresta euetnn 2 26 2 8 2 Temperature Display sssirsiirsirsiiserirereirireiinerisosirisirerirosirenins 2 28 2 8 3 OR BC EO ES O E E E EE E 2 28 2 8 4 DME ar
3. 4 4 4 3 1 Displaying Terrain Proximity seennnnes 4 5 4 3 1 1 Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page 4 5 4 3 1 2 Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page 4 6 4 3 1 3 Terrain Proximity Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings 4 6 4 3 1 4 Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data 4 7 4 3 2 Terrain Proximity Limitations ea ia aeceue tuae sek ameet aes eb Potete Ses 4 9 4 3 3 E 4 9 Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS B Optional 4 10 4 4 1 TAWS B Ure GUIGIN GINS eene to eteud iota tto ep dine ene mae E et Haeret 4 10 4 4 2 Ines Nc M 4 10 4 4 3 Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS sese 4 11 4 4 4 Baro Corrected Altitude Versus GPS MSL Altitude 4 11 4 4 5 V WO TAN 4 12 4 4 6 Bie SW SEP 4 12 a PB MEMENTO 4 13 4 4 1 TAWS Aleris 4 17 4 4 7 1 TAWS B Alerting Colors and Symbology 4 18 4 4 7 2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert see 4 20 4 4 7 3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance essss 4 21 4 4 7 4 Premature Descent Alerting eene 4 21 4 4 7 5 Inhibiting Enabling TAWS Alerting esses 4 23 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 7 6 Five Hundred Aural Alert
4. x lt Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A GARMIN 5 4 SafeTaxi SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming in on airports at close range The airport display on the map reveals runways with numbers taxiways with identifying letters numbers airport Hot Spots and airport landmarks including ramps buildings control towers and other gt prominent features Resolution is greater at lower map ranges When the aircraft location is within the screen boundary including within SafeTaxi ranges an aircraft symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced position awareness Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways and or complex ramp areas Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion Foreword stem MFD 1 TE NORTH Ur E ERE i Taxiway Identification Hot Spot 5 Outline E Aircraft position E DCLTR Soft Key Removes Taxiway Markings 3 Figure 5 15 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page E A NOTE Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20 159 and are not qualified to
5. eeee 4 4 7 7 Negative Climb Rate After Take Off Alert NCR 4 4 7 8 TAWS Not Available Alert eene 4 4 7 9 TAWS Failure Alert een 4 4 8 TAW System SU MR OE 45 Externa NOR r Pm BO VON elie a C s 4 6 1 Terrain SVT Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings sssssse 4 6 2 Terrain SVT Page Aviation Data 4 6 3 Inhibiting Enabling Terrain SVT Alerting 4 6 4 Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations 42 TAS Traffic ODOM al sesciadaitupt as Metri ait Wiicaniuatianiattands 4 7 1 Displaying and Operating Traffic TAS Systems 30 4 7 1 1 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes 4 33 chee TQM NG re 4 33 gt 4 7 2 Altitude Display 4 34 Z 8 4 7 3 TAS VOO O aceaeaseaceeaczaesucecucanussanedsecaecececacuenseehaeesecsascecs 4 35 5 4 7 4 Tian S SIBI S ACS og sch cere tee uc se eee beatae vcn 4 36 4 1 55 Traffic Pop Up ssssssssseeenee 4 38 Ey 4 8 TIS Traffic Optional 4 39 88 4 8 1 TaN NOV er us 9 NR 4 39 4 8 2 issuer 4 4 9x 48 3 TIS Limitations 4 42 88 5 4 8 4 lr c c 4 44 4 8 5 li Pici TE 4 45 a 4 9 XM WX Satellite Weather Optional 4 48 3 4 9 1 Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products 4 48 4 9 2 Customizing the XM WX
6. G 29 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A GARMIN curvature of the earth can also be a factor especially at range settings of 150 NM or more Foreword System Figure 4 68 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth 4 10 1 3 Radar Signal Attenuation The phenomena of weather attenuation needs to be kept in mind whenever operating the weather radar When the radar signal is transmitted it is progressively absorbed and scattered making the signal weaker This weakening or attenuation is caused by two primary sources distance and precipitation PFD a UW S lt Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the amount of radar energy at a distance from the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of the distance The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills the radar beam will be one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer Internal circuitry within the GWX 68 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation Features amp Alerts Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation It is also more intense As the radar signal passes through moisture a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna However much of
7. HEXRAD Oote Viewing Range NEXRAD Call Hovoment Fanan mes adi 99 MA Lightning Virwing Range eDUPpIOAV piezeH Y 29 G 298 sainjea4 euonippy Figure 3 45 NEXRAD Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Weather Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Sue v 9 unuuv 9 298 sioquJ S LS 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option y xipueddy leSso D 8 29S Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 31 A GARMIN NEXRAD Cell Movement Ihe NEXRAD Cell Movement option selects whether NEXRAD Cell Movement is shown on the Navigation Map NEXRAD Cell Movement will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected NEXRAD Cell Movement will not be shown In the example below where 150 NM is selected the NEXRAD Cell Movement will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower Foreword Sec System NAVIGATION MAP 1 SETUP GROU Heather Sec 2 PFD NEXRAD Doto Viewing Range HEXRAD Cell Havnment Rene AD a n AM Lishtning Viewing Ronee nm SONH Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features
8. CONNECTED ieSso D 8 29S Call Time 6 19 Press CLR to hide y xipuaddy Xepu g xipueddy NAVIGATION MAP 1 MT Y HANG UP Y Figure 3 107 Connected Call Pop Up 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 77 A GARMIN 3 5 Flight Plan Pages Use the Flight Plan page group to view details about your flight plan route Ihe Flight Plan Function shows the Current Flight Plan that is active in the navigation source displayed on the CDI 3 5 1 Active Flight Plan Page The Active Flight Plan box shows all of the legs of your flight plan with the current leg indicated in magenta Listed are each leg with the Desired Track DTK Distance DIS and Estimated Time of Arrival ETA for the legs METARs are shown for waypoints in the flight plan In the Minimums window the source and selected value are shown See section 2 4 4 on Minimum Descent sf Altitude MDA or Decision Height DH in the PFD section and section 3 5 1 3 ilu for more detail In the Active Leg Info box in the lower part of the display the Course with beginning and ending waypoints Active Leg En Route Safe Altitude ESA and Route ESA are shown METAR information is in the METAR section of the Hazard Avoidance section DTK Distance and ETA Digital Chart from the Previous Leg Available For Waypoint ACTIVE FLIGHT PLA DTK DIS ETA CHAT METAR Graphic METARs Current Leg Flight Plan Legs Bar O HIMIHLIMS ora SOURCE T ALTITUDE
9. Flight plan legs Map Pointer information distance and bearing to pointer location of pointer name and other pertinent Topography scale N Ui Va WY e Track vector information Topography data Map range XM NEXRAD Weather gt 82 Wind direction and speed XM Lightning A T 2 Map orientation XM Storm Cells E Icons for enabled map features Ln E E Symbols used on the MFD are detailed in Section 7 A 3 Wind Vector and Speed Map Orientation Pay ts 3 E Procedure Turn in us TFR Data Window o Flight Plan bees CS eee z E Elevation Window u Topo Scale ge Active Flight ee Plan Le raffic Icons E g with Relative P Aircraft Symbol Altitude and Trend E Present Position Indicator z Terrain Symbol i TERRAIN Terrain Data Scale Indicates Terrain is ase Bu E EP Displayed TE A Map Range Ze Page Name EPTETETE u Page Location lt LLIK HAF id ERIS Figure 3 4 MFD Map Description 34 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 1 Default Navigation Map Page While on any page of the MFD you may easily return to the first Navigation Map page of the Map group by pressing and holding the CLR key to return to the first page Home Page of the Map group 3 3 2 Editing Information 1 Press the small MFD knob to activate editing 2 Turn the large MFD knob to select desired item Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Pre
10. mn STATICHARY OCCLUDED TROUGH HIGH CITY FORECAST WEVRD CELL How PART SUH COUNTY WARNINGS SEVERE THUROERS TURF TORHADO FL OD CYCLON LIGH TIL Fels Sh SIGHET LOCALIZED SIBHET FREEZING LEVELS IFT WIRDS ALOFT 12000 D KOTS a 11600 5 ETS OF LESS un TR tab 18 KROTS OR LESS 1 BOEU TaD Sa amp hnOTS OF LESS i 20000 Figure 4 34 Weather Legends 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 53 A GARMIN 2 An abbreviated legend may be displayed on the upper right side of a WX Data Link Map page for the applicable weather products when selected in the Page Menu options for Weather 4 9 5 NEXRAD p WSR 88D or NEXRAD NEXt generation RADar is a network of 158 high resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather Service NWS NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information So for the continental United States and selected overseas locations The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM The NEXRAD network provides important information about severe weather for air traffic safety 3 NEXRAD datais not real time The lapsed time between collection processing and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data it should be used for long range planning purposes only Never use NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrat
11. 1 The desired approach is selected and activated in the navigator this can be u verified by the approach waypoints appearing on the GDU 620 MFD Nav Map z Page or FPL Page 2 The appropriate frequency is the active frequency in the navigator TE 3 The CDI selection on the GDU 620 is changed to NAV course pointer for the 2 active navigator NOTE If the NAV course pointer is displayed for the active navigator when the approach is activated and the localizer frequency is tuned the pilot will need to switch to another CDI source and then back to NAV for the course pointer to Auto Slew For example if NAV1 is currently selected the pilot must press the CDI soft key twice NAVI GPS1 NAV1 P OR EE press the 1 2 soft key twice NAVI gt NAV2 gt NAV1 NOTE For LOC BC approaches the course pointer will slew 180 degrees from the inbound course 2 24 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Example of activating Auto Slewing in the G600 DJOM9JOJ cn WN 4 8 T Course Pointer slewed to 312 for the ILS 8 z i g E 5 E NW 1 05 JUN 2008 15 O AL 2008 AW 298 e2UPepIOAV piezeH y 29 Figure 2 34 Auto Slewing HSI with ILS Loaded and Shown with the Corresponding Approach Plate SoJn eo euonippy G 99S 1 The aircraft is flying vectors to final on an active ILS approach with the appropriate approach in the GNS navigator sua v 9 unuuv 9 298 2 The appropria
12. Database NamBis page Pert OEHSTADLLE VERSION OHSTADLE CYCLE Database Effectivity Date Database Soft Keys Figure 6 1 System Status 6 10 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 7 SYMBOLS The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the MFD Map displays 7 41 Map Page Symbols Symbol Description 000 Non towered Non serviced Airport o DC e Non serviced Towered Non serviced Airport Pa Non towered Serviced Airport a Towered Serviced Airport Ee Soft Surface Serviced Airport Oo Soft Surface Non serviced Airport Pete Oo mm ooo Intersection LOM compass locator at outer marker NDB ee directional Radio Beacon Table 7 1 Map Page Symbols 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 1 A GARMIN 7 2 SafeTaxi Symbols Symbol Description Under Construction Zones M a Unpaved Parking Areas Table 7 2 SafeTaxi Symbols 7 3 Traffic Symbols Description Highest to Lowest Priority Trattic Advisory TA In Range Traffic Advisory TA Out of Range Proximate Advisory PA Other Traffic Table 7 3 Traffic Symbols 1 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 7 4 Terrain Obstacle Symbols Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Height is less than Height is less Height is greater Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL than 1000 ft AGL than 10
13. NAVIGATION HEP 1 SET GROUP Hop ORIENTATION Trock up HORTH UP AT TUDHI AUTO 200H LAND BATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR HAV RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE OBSTACLE VIEWING RANGE LAT LON VIEWING RANGE FIELD OF VIEW a i LETT ti IL Figure 3 38 Navigation Map Obstacle Data Selection 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 3 26 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN Lat Lon Viewing Range The Lat Lon Viewing Range option selects whether Lat Lon line is shown on the MFD Lat Lon lines will be shown at and below the selected map range Map ranges t above the selected value will not show the nis Lat Lon lines When Off is selected Lat eas Lon lines will not be shown In the figure below where 200 NM is selected Lat Lon lines will be shown at map ranges of 200 05 NM and lower ORIENTATION TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE LAT LON VIEWING RANGE OFF BDUHH BB e l tTICCMMNMENETERIT III IITCTCEN IAM c Lat Lon Reference Information Figure 3 40 Navigation Map L Truck up TAn n n pm n a ALIN HE 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of
14. Press die MED Eh ta mirn io bie pg Frea the HD im to reja to her mg Figure 4 94 GFDS Registration Page Default and Completed Sec4 14 11 1 2 Deactivate Unit Registration With GFDS Registration of the GDU unit with GFDS can be deactivated so that the unit can no longer make requests to GFDS This does not cancel the subscription lw N mc r z 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the A MENU key to display the Page Menu Options _ 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Register With GFDS Press ENT s 3 With the Access Code field highlighted press CLR to remove the access code 4 Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the GFDS account 4 104 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 2 Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page the age of the data is displayed on the screen The age of the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time Weather products are refreshed at selectable intervals s If for any reason a weather product is not refreshed within the 30 60 90 or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals the data is considered expired and is _ removed from the display This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with
15. Terrain is more than 1000 feet below the aircraft i Table 4 2 Terrain Scale Color Codes 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 3 A GARMIN 4 3 Terrain Proximity Garmin Terrain is a non TSO CI151b terrain awareness system provided as a standard feature of GDU 620 to increase situational awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain CFIT Terrain may be displayed on the Map page 32 group Navigation Map and Terrain pages Termin Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite g measurements GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine Terrain alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts Terrain Proximity utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level MSL Using the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude Terrain 5 Proximity displays a 2 D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative 5 to the position and altitude of the aircra
16. a br S r Height Above Terrain Feet 1500 Sec 5 Additional Features 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 Descent Rate Figure 4 18 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 4 20 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 7 3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values table When an RTC alert and or a ROC is issued a potential impact point is displayed on the TAWS Page Imminent Terrain Impact ITI and Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircrafts projected path ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Page The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table Minimum Clearance Altitude feet Flight Phase Level Flight Descending aULPIOAY pJezey Y 29 Approach Table 4 6 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values During final approach FLTA alerts are automatically inhib
17. corner of the PFD The distance to the station and the Nav source used are shown 2 DME Information DME Hold Annunciation Selected DME Set Hold for Selected DME Figure 2 41 DME Indication 2 28 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NOTE The capability of providing DME information requires installation of the GAD 43e DJOM9JOJ 2 8 5 Marker Beacon Annunciations A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when the aircraft flies over a marker beacon The marker beacon annunciation will appear to the left of the altitude tape below the terrain annunciator on the PFD 29 cn NN e MD 3 Outer Marker Beacon Indication N 29S Current Beacon Icon Standard DULpIONY piezeH Y 29S SoJn eo euontppy G 99S S y 79 unuuv 9 22S Table 2 2 Marker Beacons 2 8 6 Miscompare Annunciations Miscompare annunciations are capable of being displayed on the PFD if the AHRS Air Data Monitor is enabled during the installation configuration S OQWAS L 29 Messages will appear in the MFD Alerts window if data is not available for the monitor AJeSSO 8 29S A miscompare condition is triggered if the difference between the data reported by GDU 1 and GDU 2 exceeds the threshold described in the following id table for at least one second 4 Z 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 29 A GARMIN Parameter Range of Trigger Threshol
18. smws Se ca mm n Pressing the BACK soft key returns to the top level soft keys Ce NE 8 cK prm mmn n Pressing the BACK soft key returns to the previous level of soft keys Figure 5 37 SVT Soft Keys z 5 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 39 GARMIN 5 7 2 Activating and Deactivating SVT NOTE In some instances such as temporary loss of GPS signal the SVT functionality will be disabled To enable SVT 1 Press the PFD soft key 2 Press the SYN VIS soft key 3 Press the SYN TERR soft key to view the SVT display When SVT is enabled the pitch ladder will display a different pitch scale Figure 5 39 Pitch Scale with SVT Disabled 5 40 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN 5 7 3 SVT Features Ho Traffic i m mi Lj ERE T LH nA La Flight Path Marker Siete Zero Pitch Line ZPL with Horizon gere Heading Marks E 3o LKNOTS ave NO M Aircraft Symbol Tu 6m E Synthetic Terrain SVT Soft Keys Figure 5 40 SVT on Primary Flight Display NOTE SVT features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude lt deviation information using the CDI VSI and VDI presentations 5 7 3 1 Flight Path Marker FPM The Flight Path Marker is also known as a Velocity Vector It is displayed 2 on the PFD at ground speeds above 30 knots The FPM depicts approximate projected path of the aircraft accoun
19. Contact your Garmin dealer for Service GAD 43 e Application SCI e Contact your Garmin dealer for integrity fault service GAD 43 e Configuration e Contact your Garmin dealer for integrity fault service 3 x e Calibration integrity e Contact your Garmin dealer for fault service e Unit fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for 2 x service a GATE MODE e Automated testing Is ON E GDL69 e GDL69 has failed Contact your Garmin dealer for service 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 6 5 A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action GEO LIMITS e AHRS1 too far North e Use alternate means of navigation South no magnetic e Check AFMS for limitations heading provided e Operating in extreme E north latitudes has rendered heading data unreliable z GPS1 2 FAIL e Communication lost e Use an alternate navigation with GPS 1 2 source a GPS 1 2 PPS e Timing data from e Contact your Garmin dealer for FAIL GPS 1 2 is lost service GSR FAIL e GSR has failed e Contact your Garmin dealer for ES service 2 GWXCONFIG GWX config error e Contact your Garmin dealer for Config service service E required GWX SERVICE GWX needs service e Contact your Garmin dealer for service 3 HDG FAULT e AHRST 2 in e Check AFMS for limitations no magnetometer e Use Compass or other course reversionary mode information Heading fault state Contact your Garmin
20. Recalling a Preset 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the PRESETS soft key y xipueddy 2 Press the preset soft key for the desired stored channel such as PS1 3 Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 29 En in 5 os o X Nn SO TO lt A GARMIN 5 5 4 GDL 69 69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure Ensure the owner operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to Sirius XM Satellite Radio Ensure the Sirius XM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver For troubleshooting purposes check the LRU Information Box on the AUX System Status Page for Data Link Receiver GDL 69 694 status serial number and software version number If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69 69A the status will be marked with a red X ua w gt 19 lt b LL 1 Turn the large MFD knob to select the AUX Page Group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the System Status Page the last page in the AUX Page Group SERIAL 8 2 VERSION GDL 69 Status OK LRU Info Window Database Window Scroll Bar for More Items OBOTROLE V
21. SHV 8 unuuy 9 29S sioquJ S L 2998 Figure 4 64 Winds Aloft Altitude Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Altitude value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Alesso 5 8 29S y xipueddy 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 11 A GARMIN 4 9 18 County Warnings County data provides specific public awareness and protection weather 5 warnings from the National Weather Service NWS This can include information on fires tornadoes severe thunderstorms flood conditions and other natural disasters Sec 4 5 te No E r 4 78 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN County Data Viewing Range The County Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range S where at and below that value County weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pages 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected County Data will not be shown In t
22. Table 4 11 Displayed Traffic Range Sec4 5 o g No E lt NOTE Traffic Advisories TAs are always displayed regardless of altitude mode 4 34 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 7 3 TAS Symbology Traffic Advisory System TAS is designed to help in detection and avoidance lt of other aircraft TAS uses an on board interrogator processor to detect traffic 2 Only aircraft with operating transponders will be detected Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols TAS Symbol Description Non Threat Traffic Intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1200 feet vertical separation Proximity Advisory PA Intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1200 feet vertical separation Traffic Advisory TA Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria Traffic Advisory Off Scale DULPIOAY pJezey Y 29 Table 4 12 Traffic Symbol Description A Non Threat Advisory shown as an open white diamond indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than 1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is _ beyond five NM A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within 1200 feet and is within five NM range but is still not considered a threat A Traffic Advisory TA alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria A Traffic Advisory
23. from parallel with the ground E E Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup At this point when flying at altitudes between 2 000 and 30 000 feet AGL any displayed target return should scrutinized If the displayed target advances 2 on the screen to 5 NM of the aircraft avoid it This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2 000 feet or less below the aircraft Raising the antenna tilt 4 can help separate ground returns from weather returns in relatively flat terrain This will place the bottom of the radar beam level with the ground Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps 4 86 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN If the aircraft is above 29 000 feet be cautious of any target return that gets to 30 NM or closer This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely If the aircraft altitude is 15 000 feet or lower set the displayed range to i 60 NM Closely monitor anything that enters the display Also after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously ground go returns can be monitored for possible threats The relationship between antenna tilt angle altitude and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude _ for every one nautical mile Vertical Change of Radar Beam feet Figure 4 72 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile gt zZ 2m
24. 4 98 4 99 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 1 3 1 15 2 1 2 18 2 33 5 42 Hot spots 5 18 5 19 Hrzn Hdg 2 4 Icing 4 66 4 119 4 120 Identifier 3 81 3 82 3 84 3 90 5 4 5 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide B 3 5 7 5 13 5 42 IFR 4 66 4 120 5 GRF model 1 4 1 13 5 ILS 2 21 2 23 2 24 2 25 7 1 Imminent obstacle impact 4 21 4 27 Imminent terrain impact 4 21 4 27 INFO soft key 3 9 3 79 amp Infra Red 4 115 Inhibit alerting 4 29 Intersection 3 7 3 36 3 39 5 19 7 1 amp Iridium 1 5 3 67 3 70 4 1 4 102 J Jeppesen 1 10 3 88 5 10 A 2 Jeppesen database A 2 A 5 L o amp Land data 3 4 3 12 3 16 3 20 x 5 Lateral deviation scale 2 18 2 20 Lat Lon 3 7 3 8 3 12 3 27 3 81 LDA 2 24 Cw Legend 3 1 2 3 33 4 5 4 1 7 4 48 4 50 4 53 4 54 4 58 4 61 4 75 4 114 4 124 Level 1 20 1 21 3 6 3 7 3 50 3 51 3 91 4 18 4 21 4 73 4 88 Lighting 1 23 3 85 Lightning 3 4 3 7 3 30 3 34 4 50 4 51 4 63 4 68 4 107 4 117 4 122 7 5 Limitations v 4 9 4 10 4 42 4 56 5 18 Localizer 2 19 2 21 2 24 2 26 Loc BC 2 24 8 LPV 2 23 2 27 LRU 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 62 5 30 6 10 Lubber line 2 18 2 20 3 Magnetometer 1 2 1 5 1 8 Making a phone call 3 76 Map 3 4 Map orientation 3 1 3 4 3 13 3 14 3 81 4 5 4 14 4 50 4 57 4 107 Map panning 3 8 B 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Map pointer 3 4 3 8
25. 9 NEXRAD Next Generation Radar OAT Outside Air Temperature OBS Omni Bearing Selector PA Proximity Advisory PC personal computer PDA Premature Descent Alert PFD Primary Flight Display P POS Present Position PTK parallel track QTY quantity x 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 8 5 R RAIM RAM REF REQ REV 5 RMI RNG RNWY a ROC RT RTC SBAS SCIT SD A d S SFC SIAP Appendix B Sec 8 Sec 7 Index Appendix A Glossary Symbols ss SID 8 SIGMET SMBL SPD Z SRVC SVC STAR STATS STBY STD SUA SUSP SVT SW SYS T TA TACAN TAF TAS TAS 8 6 A GARMIN right right runway Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring random access memory reference required reverse revision revise Radio Magnetic Indicator range runway Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance right Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Satellite Based Augmentation System Storm Cell Identification and Tracking Secure Digital surface Standard Instrument Approach Procedures Standard Instrument Departure Significant Meteorological Information slip skid symbol speed service Standard Terminal Arrival Route statistics standby standard Special Use Airspace suspend Synthetic Vision software system true Traffic Advisory Tactical Air Navigation System Terminal Aerodrome Forecast True Airspeed Traffic Advisory System Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A G
26. Aircraft symbol 2 8 2 18 3 4 7 6 5 31 6 5 8 1 Air Data Computer 1 1 1 4 2 28 Attitude and Heading Reference System AIRMETs 4 51 4 66 4 119 7 5 AHRS 1 4 1 7 1 11 6 2 Airport beacon 7 2 Attitude Indicator 2 8 2 9 Airport diagram 5 10 5 16 A 4 Aural message 4 12 4 16 4 17 4 19 Airport Directory 3 86 A 4 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 31 Airport signs 2 4 5 42 Automatic flight following 3 69 Airspeed Indicator 1 22 2 5 2 6 Autopilot 1 1 2 3 5 31 Airspeed reference 1 20 1 21 2 7 3 52 Autopilot disconnect 5 31 Airspeed tape 2 5 2 6 2 17 3 52 Auto slewing 2 24 Airspeed trend vector 2 5 Auto zoom 3 12 3 15 Air temperature 1 4 1 5 2 1 2 28 Aux mode 3 50 Airways 3 4 3 7 3 12 3 48 AUX System Status page 5 12 Alerts 2 13 2 14 3 80 4 4 4 17 4 18 AUX System Status Page 5 21 4 20 4 25 4 30 4 41 4 44 6 1 Aviation map data 3 36 Altimeter ii 2 12 2 14 4 11 Altitude 1 1 1 4 1 15 1 22 2 10 2 13 B 2 14 3 25 3 50 3 55 3 58 Backcourse 2 23 2 24 3 80 4 4 Backlighting 1 23 Altitude alerter 2 13 3 80 5 8 Baro corrected altitude 4 11 Altitude alerting 2 13 Barometric minimum 2 14 Altitude Bug 1 15 2 1 2 12 Barometric pressure 1 17 1 20 1 22 Altitude capture 5 32 2 14 3 55 3 59 Altitude Display Mode 4 32 4 34 Basemap symbols 7 4 Altitude minimums 3 80 5 8 Beacon 7 1 7 2 Altitude select 1 15 Bearing information 2 26 2 27 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide B 1 Bearing line 2 27 4
27. Alerts 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Echo Top Data Viewing Range g value AE T 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted RE 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option m E 25 4 60 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 9 10 Cloud Tops NOTE Due to similarities in color schemes the display of Cloud Tops is mutually exclusive with Echo Tops and NEXRAD imagery Figure n 42 XM Weather Cloud Top gt zZ T E e rar Cloud Tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite n pJezey 7 29 To display the Cloud Tops legend select the LEGEND soft key when Cloud 2 R Tops is selected for display Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude display of these weather products is mutually exclusive When Cloud Tops is activated Echo Tops or NEXRAD data is not E 4 shown 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 61 Sec4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 A GARMIN Cloud Top Data Viewing Range The Cloud Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map z range where at and below that value Cloud Top weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2
28. Depending on the installation GPSS mode may be toggled on off with an external switch or by pressing and holding the HDG key on the PFD If the installation uses the HDG key on the PFD the PFD knob window will display the GPSS HDG mode options Nn HOLD HDG ZS FOR GPSS HOLD HDG FOR HDG BUG GPSS OFF GPSS ON Figure 5 31 GPSS mode control with the HDG key When GPSS mode is on the heading bug on the HSI changes to a hollow outline and a crossed out heading bug appears in the PFD Knob Mode Indicator indicating that the autopilot is not coupled to the heading bug The bug is still 4 controllable and may still be used by the pilot for reference GPSS is annunciated lt in the lower left portion of the PFD The GPSS mode annunciation depends on the location of the NAV STATUS information as shown in the following figure ua w E gt a gt lt P LL c ES 5 lt GP5o EX NAV Status Style 1 NAV Status Style 2 Figure 5 32 GPSS Mode Annunciations 5 6 5 Flight Director Display If autopilot flight director commands are interfaced to the G600 they will be presented as a single cue flight director on the PFD Control of the flight director is accomplished via the autopilot flight director controller there are no pilot z 2 controls or adjustments for the flight director on the G600 The G600 system limits the distance the flight director pitch commands may 5 34 Garmin G600 Pilot s
29. Each LRU has a particular function or set of functions that contributes to the system s operation 1 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN 1 1 2 GDU 620 The GDU 620 has dual VGA 640 x 480 pixels 6 5 inch LCD displays The left side of the GDU is a PFD and the right side is the MFD In some models or installations the PFD and MFD and their controls are switched to the other side The MFD shows a moving map flight plan weather and other supplemental data The PFD shows primary flight information in place of traditional pitot static and gyroscopic systems and also provides an HSI for navigation i DJOM9JOJ su Jy saunjeo SDULPIOAY JN d unuuv Jeuonippy piezeH c 29g Z 29S sioquJ S L 98 AJeSSO S 8 299 Figure 1 3 GDU 620 PFD and MFD with PFD on Right y xipuaddy X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 3 y 295 G 29 9 29 Sec 4 Sec 5 Sec 6 A GARMIN 1 1 3 GDC 74A 74B Ihe GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer ADC compiles information from the pitot static system and an Outside Air Temperature OAT sensor The GDC 74A 74B provides pressure altitude airspeed vertical speed and OAT information to the G600 system The GDC 74A 74B communicates with the Oo O D E O LL GDU 620 and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital interface N 3 q no Sec 3 MFD Figure 1 4 GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer 1 1 4 GRS 77 The GRS 77
30. More detailed information about a selected waypoint is available by pressing the RWY FREQ or APT DIR soit keys on the Waypoint Information page The current destination waypoint is the default item shown You may select a different Ident Facility or Location In the Runway window you may view information about the runways available if a highlighted arrow is shown In the Frequency window a scroll bar is shown on the right side of the window when more frequencies are available ORT FACLI TIY CITY Facility LE Information Window Runway Information Window Airport Frequency Window WAYPOINT IMFORHATION E i Eng DEN HOT Fj RWF BE ADVISORY Figure 3 117 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Detail 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 83 A GARMIN Ident Facility City Selection The current destination Identifier Facility Type with icon Facility Name and City location are shown in the top window of the Flight Plan mode Waypoint Information page The default is the Nearest airport if there is no active flight plan New Identifiers may also be selected as shown in section 3 5 3 3 IDENT FACILITY CITY Access Public Identifier Private and Facility Name Symbol City Figure 3 118 Flight Plan Ident Facility City Detail 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ APT DIR or WX soft keys to view information about the waypoint E 2 The current
31. Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Show Tilt Line menu item and press the ENT key This displays the Tilt Line 2 Press the MFD knob to activate the Tilt Adjustment in the Control window Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Tilt value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Tilt value lOAY oo N aA 2 a Pe a re a a gt 4 10 6 4 Adjusting Gain The gain is used to adjust the sensitivity of the radar receiver It can be used to adjust the characteristics of the returns Gain adjustment is shown in the Gain bar graph The white reference line on the right side of the bar graph indicates the calibration reference point WARNING Changing the gain in weather mode will cause precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of precipitation A NOTE Gain can be adjusted in Weather mode on the GWX radars only 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 05 A GARMIN 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU key 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Manual Gain and press ENT This will highlight the Gain value in the Control window 3 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain OR 1 Press the MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Gain value in the Control wind
32. Sec 7 Symbols ld Figure 5 36 Synthetic Vision Imagery PFD 1 2 pen Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 5 38 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 7 1 SVT Operation SVT is activated from the PFD using the soft keys located along the bottom edge of the display Pressing the soft keys turn the related function on or off SVT functions are displayed on three levels of soft keys The PFD soft key leads into the PFD function soft keys including synthetic vision Pressing the c SYN VIS soft key enables synthetic vision and displays the SYN TERR HRZN HDG and APTSIGNS soft keys The BACK soft key returns to the previous level of soft keys HRZN and APTSIGNS soft keys are dependent upon the state of the SYN TERR soft key When Synthetic Terrain is deactivated the SYN TERR soft key appears illuminated while the remaining SVT soft keys are unavailable for selection and subdued black with dark gray characters If Synthetic Terrain is deactivated all other SVT features are also deactivated With Synthetic Terrain activated all other SVT features may be turned on or off at the pilots _ discretion 32 SYN TERR soft key enables synthetic terrain depiction HRZN HDG soft key enable horizon heading marks and digits TI t te e a n Jeuonippy G 99S e APTSIGNS soft key enables airport signposts JE IE co ve Pr nnn V
33. T E e rar pJezey Y 29 Therefore with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four z v degrees below parallel with the ground a target return at 10 NM is approximately 2 5 9 4 000 feet below the aircraft at 20 NM 8 000 feet at 50 NM 20 000 feet In other words at this tilt setting a ground return such as a mountain peak being displayed at 10 NM would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4 000 lt feet If that ground target return moves to 5 NM maximum distance below the aircraft will be 2 000 feet This setup will provide a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 68 3 There are many other factors to consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations 4 10 5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation 4 10 5 1 Weather display Interpretation When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display the colors denote approximate rainfall intensity and rates as shown in the table below 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 8 A GARMIN GWX 68 Radars 3rd Party Radars Weather Mode erus Approximate Radar Return Level Color e Rainfall Rate see radar documen y in hr tation for details MAGENTA 50 dBZ and greater Table 4 23 Precipitation Intensity Levels 4 10 5 2 Thunderstorms Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud The more severe the drafts the greater the number and size
34. Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 84 Sector Scan Full 5 Turn the small MFD knob to select FULL 60 40 or 20 scan 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 97 Sec4 TO N 1 au a YU S r 2 A GARMIN TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 85 Sector Scan 40 6 It desired readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan 7 Remove Sector Scanning by returning the SECTOR SCAN value to FULL 4 10 6 6 Antenna Stabilization 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization press the STAB ON soft key to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF soft key to deactivate The current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display 4 10 6 7 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight WATCH GWX Radars Only While in horizontal scan mode this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy This weakening is known as attenuation The radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation large areas of lesser precipitation and distance Issues with the radome will also attenuate the radar energy All thes
35. magnetometer or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts refer to Section 6 for specific AHRS alert information Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information indicated by red X flags over the corresponding flight instruments Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols A maximum of two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS If GPS information from one of the inputs fails the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot If both GPS inputs fail the AHRS will continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A If the magnetometer input fails the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information and GPS Track information is used however the heading display on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red X TRK in magenta is annunciated to the right of the Track value and the Track value color is changed from white to magenta Pe D O i Appendix B 1 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NOTE In this case the magnetic standby compass and GPS ground track can be used to keep the aircraft on the desired heading m O e D O O oe Note that SVT is turned off in track based reversionary mode and must be manually re enabled when heading is restored Also
36. map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP and must be manually changed back after heading is restored When heading fails the heading bug is not removed and the GDU continues driving the autopilot heading error output using track in place of heading d C 29 zx Heading Failed Track Mode Active gt SVT Is Turned Off When Heading Fails E Figure 1 13 Track Mode shown as Active when Heading Info has failed Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information Invalid or unavailable airspeed data in addition to complete GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information Suly 8 unuuy 9 298 joquu g L S A NOTE Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and with all AHRS inputs valid 3 D GPS position magnetometer and air data During initial power up on the ground no GPS position and or magnetic anomalies are common If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3 D GPS position is available Ae 8 299 uaddy A NOTE During in flight alignment of the AHRS minimize aircraft maneuvering The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch AHRS alignment may not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 9 A
37. or your most recently selected airport RECENT 1 2 UO 4 Figure 3 126 Chart Category Selection While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft key Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise Turn the small MFD knob to show FPL NRST or RECENT Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport and then press ENT 3 5 3 4 Change Day Night View The Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment 5 The auto setting allows the user to set a percentage This percentage is the backlight value where the charts page will automatically switch between day and night mode If you set the unit to AUTO 10 then if the backlight is below 10 3 5 gt it will be in night mode if above 1096 it will be in day mode While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Charts page z Press MENU to display the Options menu Press ENT to display the Chart Setup menu The Color Scheme option will be highlighted 7 Turn the small MFD knob to select Day Auto Night Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected setting and return to the Charts page If Auto is selected turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Dis
38. what is currently being broadcast by GFDS Satellite Radio services If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow 4 11 3 Customizing the GFDS Weather Map Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually The Wx Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the Weather Legends The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of the weather products g pJezey 7 29 gt z T E e rar 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option Press ENT P 21 Mi Nini io mieua te Goes p Figure 4 95 Weather Page Menu Options E 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 105 LO Sec Additional Sec 6 Annun Car 1 DEC Sec Symbols Sec 8 Appendix B No x Ee rene Foreword System MFD Features amp Alerts GARMIN With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed turn the Large MFD knob to select the desired item WEATHER SETLP Flee Mal ultr PRELIP Doto Virwing Ronn x PRECIP Lrg um IR SAT Dotu Virvinu Range Didius GL LTES Dato Viewing Renas SIG AIR Viewing Aran HETAR Doto Virwie
39. 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 8 1 Course 2 Crosstrack Error CRS CRSR y amp CTA CTRL CUM D ALT DB DBASE DCLTR DECLTR deg DEP Desired Track DTK DEST z UFU ay O J a DME DP DPRT DSBL DIK EDR Appendix B Sec 8 Index Appendix A Glossary ELEV EMI ENR En Route Safe Altitude ENT ERR ESA ETA ETE 8 2 A GARMIN The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction left or right course cursor Control Area control The total of all legs in a flight plan density altitude database declutter degree departure The desired course between the active from and to waypoints destination default distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint Distance Measuring Equipment Departure Procedure departure disabled Desired Track Excessive Descent Rate elevation Electromagnetic Interference en route The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct to enter error En route Safe Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time En Route Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN F FAA FCC FCST FD FIS B FISDL FLIA FPL FREQ FRZ FSS ft G S GS GDC GDL GDU GEO GLS GMA GMT GMU GPS GP
40. 1 or 2 page of the Map page group press the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu Foreword Sec System Sec 2 PFD i Privo Ue HED bob be return fo bows poe OD E A Figure 3 43 Navigation Map Page Menu Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance 2 With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option press the ENT key to display the Map Setup Menu 3 Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Weather Group and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group The groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your aircraft Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols On Figure 3 44 Navigation Map Page Menu Weather Group Selection Sec 8 Glossary 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 30 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NEXRAD Viewing Range The NEXRAD Viewing Range option selects whether the NEXRAD weather s products is shown on the MFD NEXRAD weather products will be shown at gt and below the selected map range When Off is selected NEXRAD weather will not be shown Map ranges above the selected value will not show the NEXRAD weather products In the example below where 200 NM is selected the NEXRAD weather products will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower Wass 29S ddd C 298 NAVIGATION MAP 1 SETUP Ri l entier
41. 12 3 28 5 46 5 47 Five hundred aural alert 4 19 4 23 Flight director 5 34 Flight path marker 5 37 5 41 Flight phase 4 21 Flight plan 1 22 2 14 2 23 3 1 3 4 3 15 3 78 5 7 FliteCharts 3 88 5 1 5 2 5 16 A 4 A 6 FliteCharts database 5 16 A 6 Flood 4 52 4 78 Fog 4 52 4 83 Forward looking terrain avoidance 4 21 4 27 4 29 Freezing level 4 51 4 73 4 74 4 94 7 5 Frequency 2 19 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 3 83 3 85 G GAD 43 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 31 6 4 GDC 74A ii 1 1 1 4 1 5 GDL 69 69A 1 2 1 6 3 30 3 60 3 61 4 1 5 1 5 22 5 24 5 25 5 30 GDL 69 troubleshooting 5 30 GDU 620 1 1 1 3 190 00601 02 Rev F GDU 1040 1 1 Geo reference 3 88 GFDS Weather 4 102 Glideslope 2 21 2 23 Glossary 8 1 GMU 44 1 1 1 2 1 5 GPS altitude ii 4 4 4 11 GPS level of service 2 18 2 20 2 27 GPSS 5 34 Ground mapping 4 100 4 101 Ground pointer 2 1 2 9 Ground Radar 4 101 Ground return 4 84 4 86 4 101 Ground speed 2 5 2 10 4 25 5 41 GRS 77 1 1 1 4 1 13 5 31 GSR 56 1 5 3 67 3 70 GTP 59 1 2 GTX 33 1 5 4 1 GTX 330 330D 1 5 GWX 68 1 7 3 1 4 80 H Hail 4 55 4 56 4 83 4 88 4 90 Hazard avoidance 4 1 Haze 4 52 Heading 1 7 1 15 2 18 2 19 3 1 355 A 4 13 4 32 4 39 5 32 Heading bug 1 15 2 1 2 18 2 19 Heading select 1 15 Helipad 7 2 Heliport 7 1 Home page 3 5 Horizon heading 2 4 5 37 5 39 5 42 Horizon line 2 8 Horizontal scan 4 80 4 91 4 94 4 97
42. 12 Garmin Navigator Interface The G600 system requires connection to at least one external Garmin WAAS GPS navigator such as the 400W 500W series or GNS 480 1 1 13 Attitude Heading Reference System AHRS NOTE Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating in normal mode may degrade AHRS accuracy Attitude and heading information is displayed on the PFD when the AHRS receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 7 TENG plOMaJO4 29 ddd C 29 e2UepIOAV CHINA piezeH c 29g Y 29S SoJn eo euonippv y xipuaddy IeSso D sioquJ S SUe v 9 9 29g S unuuy 9 298 G 299 X PU g xipueddy Sec 4 Sec 5 Sec 6 A GARMIN AHRS Inputs AHRS AHRS Outputs GPS Magnetometer Air Data Mode Attitude Heading Available Available Normal Available Available Available Unavailable Available Available GPS Track 2 o ad Oo LL Available Unavailable Unavailable No Air Available GPS Track No Mag Unavailable Available Available No GPS Available Available Unavailable Available Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable 0 Feb Unavailable Unavailable Table 1 1 AHRS Operation AHRS Normal Heading AHRS No GPS Altitude Heading Operation Invalid Mode Invalid Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 Hazard Avoidance Additional Features Figure 1 12 AHRS Operation Loss of GPS
43. 29 9 29 A GARMIN Temperature Probe such as the GTP 59 e GMU 44 Magnetometer At least one of the following GNS 480 CNX80 GNS 400W series GNS 500W series GIN 600 series GIN 700 series or a compatible GPS Navigator GAD 43 43e Adapter Optional Interfaces to various other aircraft systems and equipment are supported including GDL 69 694 Satellite Data Link Receiver e GSR 56 Satellite Data Link Receiver SL30 NavCom Autopilot Flight Director ADF e Garmin GTS or GTX traffic awareness systems or selected 3rd party devices Audio Panel Garmin GWX radar systems or selected 3rd party radars Radar Altimeter Video Sources 58 1 1 1 Line Replaceable Units LRU This guide covers the operation of the GDU 620 display as integrated in the 5 G600 system The G600 Avionics Display System is an avionics suite designed c to replace the traditional flight instrument cluster The system combines primary flight instrumentation navigational information and a moving map all displayed on dual color screens The G600 system is composed of sub units or Line Replaceable Units LRUs LRUs have a modular design and can be installed directly behind the instrument panel or in a separate avionics bay if desired _ This design greatly eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the G600 system A failure or problem can be isolated to a particular LRU which can be replaced quickly and easily
44. 4 50 4 51 4 70 4 72 Time zone 3 5 TIS 3 35 4 39 4 41 4 42 4 44 5 1 5 44 TMA 3 12 3 41 To From Indicator 2 18 2 19 Topo data 3 12 3 20 Topo scale 3 4 3 12 3 22 Tornadoes 4 52 4 78 4 90 Track indicator 2 18 2 20 Track vector 3 4 3 12 3 17 4 43 Traffic Advisory 3 35 4 1 4 32 4 35 4 39 7 2 Traffic Pop Up 4 38 Traffic symbols 4 35 4 41 5 44 7 2 Transponder 1 5 3 35 4 1 4 32 4 35 4 39 4 42 4 44 4 45 Trend Vector 2 5 2 12 2 18 2 20 True Airspeed 1 22 2 5 2 10 True North 2 19 3 59 Turbulence 4 66 4 81 4 83 4 88 4 119 Turn Rate 2 18 Turn Rate Indicator 2 18 2 20 U Under construction 7 2 Unusual attitude 2 10 5 48 V VDI 2 23 5 41 Version 1 12 3 62 4 12 4 27 5 21 A 4 Vertical deviation 2 23 Vertical scan 4 80 4 88 4 89 4 93 4 95 4 97 Vertical speed 1 1 1 4 1 16 1 20 1 22 2 1 2 10 2 12 2 17 3 50 3 55 3 58 Vertical Speed Indicator VSI 1 22 2 17 Video 3 63 VNAV 2 23 2 27 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide VNV 8 7 Voice alert 4 44 Volume 1 6 3 61 5 25 5 28 VOR 1 15 2 3 2 19 2 21 2 26 3 1 3 7 3 12 3 36 3 40 3 56 4 13 5 19 7 1 VORTAC 7 1 Vspeeds 2 7 3 52 W WAAS 1 7 2 23 Warm front 4 70 4 71 Warnings ii WATCH 4 80 4 82 4 98 4 99 Waypoint information 3 81 3 83 3 87 5 19 Waypoint selection 3 82 Waypoint weather 3 87 Weather 3 30 3 87 4 48 4 102 Weather legend 4 48 4 53 4
45. 55 Weather mapping 4 87 Weather product 3 31 4 48 4 50 4 53 4 57 4 113 5 23 5 24 Weather radar 1 2 3 2 4 1 4 80 Weather symbols 4 50 7 5 Wind 1 20 1 21 2 28 3 4 3 12 3 18 3 50 3 53 4 51 4 52 4 66 4 68 4 75 4 120 4 122 4 124 7 5 1 6 Winds aloft 4 51 4 75 4 124 7 5 Winds aloft altitude 4 77 4 126 Wind speed 3 18 Wind Up or Down soft keys 3 3 4 75 4 71 4 124 4 126 Wind vector 1 20 1 21 2 28 3 1 3 4 3 12 3 18 3 50 3 53 7 6 WX soft key 3 9 3 79 X XM 3 60 3 61 4 48 5 22 XM channel categories 5 26 XM entertainment radio 5 22 XM radio activation 5 22 XM radio channel presets 5 29 B A GARMIN XM radio channels 5 27 XM radio volume 5 28 XM Satellite Radio 1 6 5 22 XM troubleshooting 5 30 XM weather 3 79 4 48 XM weather radio 1 6 XM weather toolbar symbols 7 5 XIK 2 21 Z Q Zero pitch line 5 41 Foreword Sec 1 System Sec 3 Sec 2 MFD Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary lt Ea Z D Q ch lt B 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2012 Garmin Corporation Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151 Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 or 800 800 1020 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Rd S E Salem Oregon 97302 U S A Tel 503 581 8101 or 800 525 6726 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Eu
46. 6 1 Terrain SVT Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 5 360 Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu 2 TERRA T nF o e TIT Figure 4 23 Terrain SVT 360 and Arc Views 1 Press VIEW and then the 360 or Arc soft key OR gt 2 Press MENU and the with the View Arc or View 360 selection highlighted press ENT Ll Fat Zren tha MED in dn trn n bose kw Press the HEU koh fr mira te bose page Figure 4 24 Terrain SVT Page Menu Viewing Selections 4 28 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 6 2 4 Terrain SVT Page Aviation Data Select the display of Aviation data on the Terrain SVT page The Page Menu z selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages I 1 While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group press MENU for Map selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages re WN lt N e D Por HFH ddd Prr tho MED bib ta airn fo mss xER Presa the MED kendb t peur n baa xe CIN Figure 4 25 Show Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain SVT Page 2 Press ENT to save the highlighted value 4 6 3 Inhibiting Enabling Terrain SVT Alerting Terrain SVT has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA aural and visual alerts Pilot
47. 620 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin Terrain The terrain database contains terrain mapping data It is updated periodically and has no expiration date Airport terrain The airport terrain database contains detailed airport terrain data It is updated periodically and has no expiration date This database is not required when a 9 arc second terrain database is in use Obstacle The obstacle database contains data for obstacles such as towers that pose a potential hazard to aircraft Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database This database is updated on a 56 day cycle Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired SafeTaxi The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways ramps runways terminals and services This database is updated on a 56 day cycle SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired FliteCharts The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only This database is updated on a 28 day cycle If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date FliteCharts no longer functions Airport Directory optio
48. 91 5 7 Record of Revisions vi Reduced required obstacle clearance 4 21 LES Reduced required terrain clearance 4 21 Reference speed 2 7 Reflectivity 4 54 4 55 4 56 4 83 4 90 Register with GFDS 4 103 Restore defaults 3 51 3 80 Restricted airspace 3 44 Roll pointer 2 8 Roll Scale 2 8 2 9 Roll scale pointer 2 1 2 9 B 5 Roll Scale Zero 2 8 E Route 3 9 3 78 5 19 Runway depiction 5 43 Runway extension 3 36 3 38 Runway information 3 83 3 85 c S amp SafeTaxi 1 10 3 15 3 36 3 37 5 1 5 18 5 19 5 20 A 4 A 5 SafeTaxi symbols 7 2 Satellite telephone 3 70 Scale 2 5 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 12 2 18 2 19 220 34 36 3 8 3 12 322 3 24 3 35 4 3 4 35 4 100 5 40 SE Scroll bars 3 89 5 3 SDF 2 24 Sector scan 4 80 4 97 p 9 Secure Digital SD card 1 10 2 1 3 1 A 1 2 Selected Altitude 2 10 2 12 2 13 2 14 3 55 3 80 4 75 4 124 Selected Course 2 22 3 55 25 Selected Heading 2 19 3 55 Serial numbers 3 62 5 30 6 10 Service Class 5 23 5 24 o S SIGMET 4 51 4 66 4 67 4 119 4 121 7 5 m Sky pointer 2 9 Sky representation 2 8 5 48 5 49 2 Slewing 2 24 Slip Skid Indicator 2 1 2 8 Snow 4 52 4 56 4 83 _ Soft keys 1 14 1 18 2 1 2 2 2 10 3 1 3 3 3 35 4 45 5 26 5 39 5 41 Software version 3 62 5 30 6 10 Speed 1 4 1 20 1 22 2 5 2 7 2 10 2 17 3 18 3 50 3 52 3 58 2 4 21 4 41 gt Speed
49. 94 4 97 4 98 Bearing Pointers 2 22 2 26 S Best glide 2 7 3 52 Bezel keys 1 15 1 17 Blind Alley 4 89 BRG 1 2 2 3 Brightness 1 20 1 21 1 23 3 50 3 51 3 9 C Calibrated gain 4 96 Call suppression 3 71 Cautions iv 3 7 3 59 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 18 4 31 4 91 4 92 4 101 5 31 CDi t15 0 44292 9 5 248 2 19 2 20 2 2 1 2 22 2 24 3 30 3 35 3 55 3 8 2 CDisource 2 21 2 24 2 27 Cell movement 3 30 3 32 4 51 4 64 4 65 7 5 Channel 1 6 3 3 3 61 5 25 5 26 5 27 23 29 7 Chart category 3 82 3 91 5 7 Charts 3 88 3 91 5 1 5 2 5 7 5 9 5 16 5 17 BE lt Chart setup 3 91 5 9 Chartview 5 1 ChartView 1 10 3 88 5 1 5 2 5 10 9 5 12 A 2 A 5 ChartView database 1 10 5 10 5 11 A 2 ChartView subscription 5 12 A 2 Check attitude 5 31 3 City 3 7 3 81 3 84 4 51 4 84 5 City forecast 4 51 4 70 4 72 7 5 Class B airspace 3 7 3 41 7 6 lt Class C airspace 3 7 3 42 7 6 Class D airspace 3 7 3 43 7 6 gt Cloud tops 4 51 4 61 4 62 7 5 Cloudy 4 52 Cold front 4 70 Compass card 2 18 2 20 County warnings 4 51 4 78 7 5 Course Deviation Indicator CDI 2 18 B 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN 2 19 2 20 2 21 Course pointer 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 24 Course select 1 15 2 1 2 22 Crossfill 1 21 3 55 Cross track error 2 21 Current heading 1 15 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 23 Current track indicato
50. ACTIVE LEG MFO Active Leg Window ACTIVE LEG ESA 1 ROUTE ESA 7 ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN HAP H E ADVISORY Figure 3 108 Flight Page 1 Active Flight Plan 3 78 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 5 1 1 Active Flight Plan Detail The active flight plan is shown on the first page of the Flight Plan page group Further information may be available for each waypoint as shown by the INFO or WX soft keys The WX soft key will only appear if a data link receiver is installed and there is a Weather subscription 1 Press the MFD knob and then use the large and small MFD knobs to highlight waypoints in the flight plan 2 Press the INFO soft key if available to view information about the highlighted waypoint 3 Press the WX soft key if available to view XM weather information about the highlighted waypoint 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Active Flight Plan page 3 5 1 2 Active Flight Plan Options The Active Flight Plan page provides information for the flight plan DE in use for navigation To change data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Change Fields and then press ENT Preces the ARG leat to rpefur fo boo mou Figure 3 109 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection 3 Turn
51. Age The weather product symbols the expiration time and the broadcast rate are gt shown in the following table The broadcast rate represents the interval at which XM WX Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather data It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the Data Link Receiver Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM WX Satellite Radio and its data vendors PN WARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions 4 50 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link z weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age A Symbol Weather Product Expiration Broadcast Time Rate Minutes mE i t are aan Exclusive all Echo Top Cloud Top and Echo Top BI Mutually Exclusive NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive Cloud Top Cloud Top and Echo Top el Mutually Exclusive aie 0009 aime 3 aU
52. Airport Sign without Identifier Airport Sign with Identifier Between 9 NM and 15 NM Between 4 5 NM and 9 0 NM c 5 a lt Sec 6 Sec 7 Annun Symbols amp Alerts Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Index Figure 5 42 Airport Signs Appendix B 5 42 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 7 3 5 Runway Depiction Runways are shown on the PFD in various ways Soft surface runways such 3 as grass runways are depicted in green Hard surface runways such as asphalt are depicted in gray Your flight plan will determine how the runway is displayed on the PFD Without a loaded flight plan a runway is shown as dark gray with the boundaries of the runway in light gray ploma UJa1s g 29 ddd C 298 Runway JN 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH Figure 5 43 Depiction of Runway with a Loaded Flight plan A runway that is not in a loaded flight plan is shown as dark gray with no other colors Tl 0 te e 1 ua Jeuonippy S y 8 unuuv sioquJ S L 29 Figure 5 44 Depiction of Runway Not in Loaded Flight plan A runway that is associated with an approach in the loaded flight plan is outlined with a white rectangle with the actual runway in that rectangle leSsO D 8 29S 1108 Tu y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 43 7 29 9 29 GARMIN 5 7 3 6 Traffic Traffic symbols ar
53. Auto Zoom range matches the manual override range known as auto sync 4 Auto Zoom is toggled off and back on in the Navigation Map Setup page OR 5 OBS mode is turned off S d cw D uT rs x X D Activating Auto Zoom 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 pages of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Auto Zoom option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off SoJn eo euonippy G 99S s y 8 unuuv 9 29 sioquJ S LS goed p i ap ee TALLU my ym ii AJTO 2004 leSsO D 8 299 i Tr Figure 3 19 Navigation Map Auto Zoom 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted y xipuaddy 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 15 A GARMIN Land Data The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features such as rivers roads cities are displayed Topo features traffic terrain and obstacles will still be displayed even with Land Data turned off Foreword While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large
54. B Index 3 58 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN MFD DISPLAY UNITS DIS SPD NAUTICAL NM KT ALT V5 DJOM9JOJ UJa1s g 29 Figure 3 76 Altitude and Vertical Speed MFD Display Units 3 4 1 8 System Display Units ddd C 298 The System Display Units options allows the selection of units to display values for Navigation Angle Magnetic or True Barometric Setting inches or Hectopascals and Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius Pressing the DFIT UNIT soft key will restore the Default Unit settings 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the System Display Units selection titled Nav Angle z S d MU D e m rs pu VS ea D 4 CAUTION The Nav Angle display units Magnetic or True must be set to the same type in both the GDU 620 and GNS navigators S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 298 SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS NAV ANGLE Say S unuuv 9 298 PRESS TEMP sioquJ S LS Figure 3 77 Nav Angle System Display Units 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Magnetic or True and then press ENT The Barometric Pressure Setting value will now be highlighted When True is selected a T will appear to the right of the heading value on the PFD SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC PRESS AJeSSO S 8 29S y xipuaddy TEMP Xepu g xipueddy Figure 3 78 Barom
55. DCLTR 3 soft key cycles back 5 x to the original map detail With Auto Zoom enabled the map will automatically zoom to 1 NM and DCLTR 0 upon landing so SafeTaxi can be viewed Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Navigation Map Section 4 5 4 1 2 Hot Spot Information Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be ace when selected 2 1 While viewing the Hot Spot area on the Navigation Map page press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Jeuonippy G 99S mul t te e a 72 2 Turn the MFD knobs to move the cursor on the Hot Spot border or into the Hot Spot area and then press the ENT key 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 19 A GARMIN INFORMATION HOTSPOT System Foreword Sec 1 Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD Aircraft Symbol Cursor Hotspot Hot spot Border Name Figure 5 16 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Information Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance 3 An information window will be shown on the MFD After viewing press the small MFD knob CLR or ENT keys to remove the information window Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the cursor ue w El gt a gt lt P LL c 5 c lt 5 4 2 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision The SateTaxi database is revised every 56 days SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date When turning on the GDU 620 the Power up Page indicates whether the databases are current out
56. E 2 Course Deviation Indicator O CDI Current Heading x 7 Rotating Compass Card 15 Lubber Line EE 8 OBS Mode Active MSG Message on Navigator Figure 2 26 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 2 18 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN The 360 HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator CDI with a Course Pointer To From Indicator and a sliding deviation bar and scale The course pointer is a single line arrow GPS1 VORI and LOCI or a double line arrow GPS2 VOR2 and LOC2 which points in the direction of the set course LOC will automatically be displayed if a localizer frequency is tuned The To From _ arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received 2 6 1 Setting the Heading Bug The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after being adjusted The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading zy NOTE The current heading will have a T to the right of the heading value when the Nav Angle is set to True in the System Setup page of the _ Aux page group SER Current Heading Magnetic North New Heading Bug Setting Heading Bug E Magnetic North SS Current Heading p True north New Heading Bug Setting e k True North aco Figure 2 27 Heading Bug Setting 1 Press the HDG key to activate HDG mode 38 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Heading Bug 3 Press the
57. Feature Options Optional The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of traffic on the Navigation Map The Traffic function E requires the installation of a compatible traffic device TIS and TAS cannot be displayed at the same time If the aircraft has a TAS unit installed the GDU J 620 will be configured for TAS If no TAS unit is installed and a GTX Mode S transponder is installed then the GDU 620 will be configured for TIS A pilot can tell which data is being displayed by the label in the top left corner TAS OPERATING vs TIS OPERATING TIS data comes from a GTX transponder Coverage is limited to specific areas as shown in the Airmens Information Manual AIM TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin GTS 800 or 820 Skywatch 497 KTA 810 or other unit Coverage follows the aircraft In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown Once outside of the selected range traffic will be decluttered The Traffic soft key will still be available S C 29 NOTE Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map 1 and 2 when the l map scale is above 150 NM SoJn eoeJ Traffic Selection Display Result No traffic displayed sue v 9 All Traffic All types of traffic displayed TA PA Traffic Alerts and Proximity Alerts displayed TA Only Traffic Alerts Only displayed Table 3 3 Navigation Map Traffic Display O
58. Figure 3 46 NEXRAD Cell Movement Selection While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Weather Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Cell Movement option Turn the small MFD knob to turn the function on or off Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts No Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Sec 7 Symbols Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 3 32 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NEXRAD Legend The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD NAVIGATION MAP 1 SI GROUP eather NEXRAD Data Viewing Range 200NM NEXRAD Cell Movement Range 15 NM NEXRAD Legend XM Lightning Viewing Range Fa I Figure 3 47 NEXRAD Legend Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Weather Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 1
59. GARMIN 1 1 14 Secure Digital Cards 5 TheG600 System uses Secure Digital SD cards to load and store various types E of data For basic flight operations SD cards are required for Terrain Obstacle FliteChart SafeTaxi and ChartView database storage as well as Jeppesen aviation and ChartView database updates The Aviation Database update card is generally A inserted in the upper SD card slot for database updates and then removed Other database cards are normally located in the lower SD card slot ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Sec 2 8 A NOTE Ensure the GDU 620 is powered off before inserting or removing an SD card MFD A NOTE Refer to Appendix A for instructions on updating the aviation database ance C mr A sec 4 3 Inserting an SD Card 1 Insert the SD card in the SD card slot the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel Avoid 2 To eject the card gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch Sec 6 I Symbols Ale f Aes Glossary manni Appendix A Appendix B Index 1 10 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A 1 2 System Power Up concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply operation A NOTE Refer to Section 6 for system specific annunciations and alerts The G600 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from elec
60. GFDS 4 104 Xil Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 2 5 3 5 4 2 9 4 11 2 Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products 4 11 3 Customizing the GFDS Weather Map essse 4 11 4 Weather Page Map Orientation 4 11 5 GFDS Data Request sssssem 4 11 5 1 GFDS Data Request Coverage sseeessees 4 11 5 2 GFDS Data Request Auto Request 4 11 5 3 GFDS Data Request Manual Request se 4 11 5 4 GFDS Data Request Status Window sssse 4 11 6 Precipitation PRECIP Data Viewing Range 4 113 _u DIL PRECIP POGOe ecu dtum Ota EIU SERO 4 114 4 11 8 GFDS Infrared Satellite IR SAT Data Viewing Range 4 115 4 11 9 Data Link Lightning DL LING Data Viewing Range 4 137 4 11 10 SIGMETs and AIRMETS SIG AIR eene 4 119 5 LAIL METAR 4 122 41112 Wind AlO mM TEC 4 124 gt Additional Features Optional nen ETE Viewing Charts sssseseeeetttetet tette D2 e ial Chart Fal UMNO oret rri wer ERA AIRE ER EDT HENDRER SEC z 5 1 2 Choosing a Chart for the Current Airport 548 S 5 1 3 Selecting a Chart by Identifier 5698 5 1 4 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT 5 7 JM Mo V ILS SI
61. Guide 1 11 GARMIN When the MFD powers up the splash screen displays the following information e Software version and part number e Basemap database version Terrain database version Airport Terrain database version Obstacle database expiration date Aviation database expiration date Airport Directory database expiration date Chart database status Databases are displayed in white if they are determined to be current Databases are displayed in yellow if they have expired are not yet effective or if the current date time is not yet available from the GPS GARMIN G600 GDU Vorsan 6 18 P u ai e9s 27 7 T l a dil i i pry QE acer Loo 408 Ge Sofelod Empires 182 0y 2018 MILES Airport leran 283 A Obstocte Expires TH NUW puti NUT BT BBRUE1 s fat Derectery bepress E PET n LE Cit n 123 Figure 1 14 System Startup Pages Pressing the ENT key or right most soft key acknowledges this information and displays the Navigation Map Page When the interfaced GPS unit has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position the aircraft s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page 1 12 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN 13 International Geomagnetic Reference Field W9J0J The IGRF International Geomagnetic Relerence Field model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only updated once every five years The IGRF model is part of the Navigation Data
62. Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN deviate from the aircraft attitude icon In the event that the pitch command provided by the autopilot flight director is greater than the distance allowed by the G600 the command bars will be displayed at the maximum distance allowed by the G600 As the aircraft pitch changes to satisfy the command bars the bars will continue to be displayed at the maximum distance from the aircraft attitude icon until the aircraft pitch deviation is within the command display limit DJ UJa1s g ddd 3IN 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH V 29S SVT Off SVT On Figure 5 33 Flight Director Bars Showing Aircraft Pitch 5 6 6 Vertical Speed Control The GDU 620 vertical speed bug may be used to control vertical speed with certain autopilots Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system e documentation for instructions on how to use the vertical speed mode if 3 available TI 0 te e 1 ua Adjust the vertical speed bug in the normal manner when using the lt vertical speed mode interface Some autopilot installations support engaging disengaging the vertical speed mode using the VS key on the PFD The PFD knob window will indicate when this function is available The vertical speed a mode may be alternately engaged or disengaged by pressing and holding the VS key on the PFD bezel HOLD HOLD S TO DISENG M TO ENGAGE gt k d ws dus Figure 5 34 Pressing a
63. MFD knob to highlight the Land Data option Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off Sec 1 System Sec 2 PFD er OD E n ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT LAND DATA Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance r pa LM j IHE i in Figure 3 20 Navigation Map Land Data Features Sec 5 Additional 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 3 16 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Track Vector Length When turned on the Track Vector Length option will show a dashed line and arrow extending from the aircraft icon illustrating the current Track and the distance the aircraft will travel in the selected time Track Vector Aircraft Present Position Figure 3 21 Navigation Map Track Vector 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Track Vector Length option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Track Vector Length time value or Of NAVIGATION HAP 1 SETLE GROUP SETUP Hi W ORIENTATION OTK uo NORTH UP AT EXIT LAND DATA n TRACK
64. Map range 1 22 3 2 3 4 3 6 3 14 3 19 4 13 4 14 5 18 Map setup 3 11 4 29 5 47 Map symbols 7 1 7 4 Map toolbar symbols 7 4 Marker beacon 2 29 Markings 2 6 5 18 5 19 Mean Sea Level 4 4 Measuring distance 3 10 Menu Key 1 17 1 18 3 5 3 11 Menus 1 17 1 18 Message 2 18 4 19 4 25 4 31 METARs 3 9 3 78 3 87 4 50 4 51 4 68 4 69 4 107 4 122 4 123 7 5 MFD 1 1 1 3 1 14 1 17 3 1 MFD display units 1 20 3 50 3 58 MFD soft keys 3 3 Military 3 12 3 45 4 56 Minimum Descent Altitude MDA 2 14 Minimums 5 8 Miscellaneous symbols 7 6 Miscompare 2 29 MOA 3 7 3 12 3 45 7 6 Moving map 1 1 1 3 1 17 3 1 3 4 3 12 MPEL 4 85 MSL 4 4 4 11 Mute 3 3 5 28 N National Weather Service 4 54 4 66 4 78 4 119 Nav angle 1 20 1 22 2 19 3 59 Navigation database 1 4 1 13 A 2 A 5 Navigation map 1 12 1 17 3 1 3 4 3 11 3 81 4 4 4 29 4 48 5 18 5 19 5 46 Navigation source iii 2 3 2 18 2 21 2 23 2 26 2 27 3 56 3 78 Nav range ring 3 4 3 12 3 19 Nav Status Bar 2 1 Nav status style 2 1 3 50 3 54 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NDB 3 7 3 12 3 36 3 39 5 19 7 1 Negative climb rate 4 19 4 24 NEXRAD 3 30 4 51 4 54 7 5 Legend 4 58 Limitations 4 56 Viewing range 4 57 NEXRAD Legend 3 33 NEXRAD Viewing Range 3 31 Night view 3 91 5 9 Normal display operation 1 1 North up 3 1 3 12 3 14 4 48 4 50 4 107 NOTAM 5 9 5 10 Notes v NRST 3 91 5 7 O O
65. PFD knob in HDG mode to set the Heading Bug to the current Ra heading 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 19 A GARMIN 2 6 2 Turn Rate Indicator The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half standard and standard turn rates A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn rate The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds based on the present turn rate A standard rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark corresponding to a predicted heading of 18 from the current heading At rates greater than four deg sec an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid Foreword stem U D WY CY U CD Un Turn Rate indication ANG Arrowhead shown for a 7 Heading Bug Turn Rate gt 4 deg sec BSS i Gandara Lubber Line lt L Turn Rate Current Track Indicator T E i Figure 2 28 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector 2 7 Course Deviation Indicator s S The Course Deviation Indicator CDI moves left or right from the course Uu E a m pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course If the course deviation data is not valid the CDI is not displayed nee 360 HSI AE GPS Level o 5 of Service ae Navigation i
66. Position reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight Present Position Press ENT Destination GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Destination Press ENT 2 The Destination box will be checked and weather information will be requested around your flight plan destination 3 To deselect Destination reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight 2 Destination Press ENT ee Flight Plan GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Flight Plan Press ENT 2 The range list will now be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to ionight E the desired range and press ENT A WDS DATA REQUEST COVERAGE PRESENT POSITION DESTINATION H FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT DIAMETER RTE WIDTH AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE Figure 4 101 Flight Plan GFDS Data Request 3 The Flight Plan box will be checked and weather information will be reinstall a along your flight plan forward of your present position for the range selected 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 109 Sec4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 A GARMIN 4 To deselect Flight Plan reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight Flight Plan Press ENT Foreword Waypoint GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Waypoint Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Selection field will now be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
67. Request Auto Update Rate 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 111 A GARMIN 4 11 5 3 GFDS Data Request Manual Request gt TheGFDS weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic update timing by selecting a Manual Request When multiple requests are made some products are merged with the old data SIGMETs AIRMETs TAFs TFRs 4 and METARs but the old data of other products is discarded 52 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Manual Request Send Reg 2 Press ENT REQUEST STATUS OK Hext auto updole B Minutes Figure 4 105 Manual GFDS Data Request 3 The update request will occur immediately The action will be noted in the Request Status window The Auto Request time will be reset to the selected value Sec 4 S TE N lt 4 11 5 4 GFDS Data Request Status Window gt The Request Status window will show a response such as OK when manual requests are made The time for the next auto update will be shown 4 112 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 6 Precipitation PRECIP Data Viewing Range The PRECIP Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below the selected value PRECIP weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected PRECIP weather data will not be shown In the figure below where 500 NM is selected PRECIP data will be sh
68. SID S TAR BR JN charts 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft lt key to activate chart selection Um 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport identifier x 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart gt 2 2 5 v V unuuv V NANNY M U Jg q V Figure 5 12 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport ChartView shown 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 13 A GARMIN 4 Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart EET kamini T r NEPTENEN SALE REG Baii 10 1 FNAV GPS Hay 31 te zi BE n iem gus 1a pun RA Ca irer BETTY m arts Se TM Figure 5 13 Selected Chart for the Cunt Airport ChartView shown 5 Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart The Detail key is only available with ChartView En in 5 v o Nn SO TO lt Nn w E gt a gt lt P LL Me APH Climb T 3700 direc ARTIT eed hold Canti noe v eimh in haleg Ta XIV TrAF Bu FLISD rait kinem miar Ah M rm m om ni Lider er eie Pere allein il Veri a F bimi TE T abico dij c nae P 4 CALCOT E p 4 fiai corirclad bgheng 110 1 PROFILE HINTMUMS HACK Figure 5 14 Detail of the Selected Chart Header Shown 5 14 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 6 Press the Header Plan Profile or Minimums keys to view
69. Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190 00355 04 Rev G or later for further information 3 gt AAC A If XM WX Satellite weather services have not been activated all the weather R product boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page Map Page Group The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription E D e lt 2 5 v V unuuv V 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 23 A GARMIN 5 5 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information Ihe Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius 5 XM Satellite radios service class and products when the GDL 69 694 is installed and the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated The Data and Audio radios have separate Identification Numbers The Service Class determines the features that are available The Weather Products window shows the products with a solid box to the left of the product active with your subscription The boxes for products not in your subscription will be hollow DATA RADIO AUDIO RADIO SERVICE CLASS WEATHER PRODUCTS TS wn n TE 5 o ND o L lt INSTRUCTION XH INFORAATIOH LOCK Figure 5 18 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information 1 Inthe AUX page group turn the small MFD knob to display XM Information 2 The LOCK soft key is used to
70. Soft Key Controls 5S The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays The soft key 5 labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed The bezel keys below the soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display Press the soft key located directly below the soft key label To select the function indicated on the soft key label press the soft key directly below the label en Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Keys NAVIGATION HAP 1 AP AUX FPL N Git TERRAIN BACK Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Figure 1 20 MFD Soft Key Layout Nvininancr voiqance 1 4 3 Using the Page Menus pE z The GDU 620 has a dedicated MENU key that when pressed displays a context sensitive list of options for functions in the MFD This options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently displayed window page There is no all encompassing lt menu Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view edit select and review options Menus display No Options when there are no s options for the window page selected Soft key presses do not display menus or submenus Navigating within a Menu Z 1 Press the MENU key to display the menu 2 Turn the small or large MFD knob to scroll thr
71. Terrain Proximity 3rd party _ w 3rd party E EN Terrain TeminSVT 660 G600 G600 660 Terrain LL wi GNS GTN 4 GNS GTN GNS GTN TAWS TAWS on on TAWS Terrain SVT 3rd party 6600 TAWS B G600 G600 G600 G600 Table 4 1 G600 Terrain Annunciations SVT Terrain Obstacle shading is only available when SVT is enabled and displayed Tf the Garmin GPS TAWS is not available the G600 Terrain SVT will generate PFD annunciator text and aural callouts An advisory message will indicate when reversion to Terrain SVT alerting has occurred GNS GTN TAWS may be provided by a GNS 500WT series or GIN series navigator with TAWS The GNS GTN TAWS must be interfaced to the G600 as GPS 1 4 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN In all configurations any terrain information or alerts displayed on the MFD are generated by the G600 Each of the terrain awareness configurations are detailed in the following sub sections 2 4 2 Terrain Scale The Terrain Scale option in the Map page group selects whether the Terrain s Scale is shown on the Navigation Map The Terrain scale will be located on the right side of the display TERRAIN 35 BBrFT 15 5 5 ag 55 Figure 4 1 Terrain Scale pJezey Y 29 gt zZ oO a T e rar Color Description Red Terrain is more than 100 feet above the aircraft AEG Terrain is between 1000 feet below and 100 feet above the aircraft
72. Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group On Navigation Map page 1 or 2 press the MAP soft key to show the TERRAIN soft key RO ee Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts UO lt Press the TERRAIN soft key to overlay terrain on the Navigation Map Sec 7 Symbols 4 3 1 3 Terrain Proximity Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 360 Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu 1 Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys 2 Press the 360 or Arc soft key OR Press MENU and with the View Arc or View 360 selection highlighted press ENT Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 4 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN or View A rE Prea ihe HU ioh in retira ti mas ppe TERARIN PROXIHITY 350 I ous 4 5 Terrain Page with 360 Rings Figure 4 6 Terrain Page with 120 Arc 4 3 1 4 Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page 1 While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group press MENU for Map 4 selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page Pred fhe HO boh in retira te hre pope Prea the WU kant to reira io bna mga Figure 4 7 Show Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain Page 2 Press ENT to save the highlighted v
73. USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 7 Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace with a new or newly overhauled replacement product the product or software or offer a full retund of the purchase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY c Online Auction Purchases Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for i warranty coverage Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification To obtain warranty service an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction International Purchases A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country If applicable this warranty is provided by the local in country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device lt lt Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom the United States Canada or Taiwan for service To obtain warranty ser
74. Unable to Determine Bearing Aircraft Distance Is 6 0 NM 1100 ft Above and Descending Figure 4 28 Traffic Map Page TAS 4 7 1 1 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed The ability to switch from standby to operating mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff 1 While viewing the Traffic Page of the MAP page group select the OPERATE soft key to select Operating Mode 2 To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page select the STANDBY soft key NOTE Not all TAS systems can be controlled from the G600 The Operate Standby soft keys may not be displayed An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air 4 7 1 2 Range Ring Pressing the RNG keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on the installed equipment 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 33 gt zZ e T E e a gt pJezey 7 22 A GARMIN 4 7 2 Altitude Display Changing the altitude display mode E 1 Press the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude volume 2 Select the desired altitude volume by pressing the BELOW NORMAL ABOVE or UNREST unrestricted soft keys The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode field Altitude Mode Displayed Traffic Range 9700 feet to 2700 feet 2700 feet to 2700 feet 2g 2700 feet to 9700 feet AI Traffic Shown
75. a dE D Vertical Deviation Source Vertical Deviation Indicator CIN pJezeH 7 29g Figure 2 32 Vertical Deviation Indicator ILS Source The vertical deviation is similar to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance LNAV V L VNAV LPV When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation source the Vertical Deviation Indicator appears as a magenta diamond If the approach type downgrades to LNAV past the final approach fix FAF or the approach only supports LNAV service NO GP is annunciated euonippv Uhuuv 9 298 Vertical Deviation Source El 31 Vertical Deviation Indicator JeSSO L y xipueddy Figure 2 33 Vertical Deviation Indicator GPS Source g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 23 A GARMIN 2 7 4 X Auto Slewing _ The G600 system is designed to interface with GNS navigator units and also manage up to four different CDI course pointers GPS1 NAVI GPS2 NAV2 independently The G600 will automatically slew the NAV course pointer to the correct final approach course when a ILS LOC LOC BC LDA or SDF approach is active in the GNS navigator and the appropriate frequency is in the active window in the navigator The G600 will Auto Slew the HSI course pointer for an ILS LOC LOC BC LDA or SDF approach when the steps below are completed in the following order
76. accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A 2 i Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appendix B Index 4 76 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Winds Aloft Altitude The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where at and lt below that value Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL Pressing the WIND DOWN or WIND UP soit keys steps down or up in the 3 000 foot increments In the figure below where 6000 feet is selected Winds Aloft data will be shown at 6000 feet and lower UJ91s g 298 P oO o o EM DATA LINK SETUP Has Orientation Trat up HEXRAD Onte Virwene Ronan OFF z NEXRAD Legend n us Echo Tee Qotn Virwing Fanni 15BuH Claud Tas Dota Virwing Ranas OFF Lightring Geto Viewiew Annee ST Call Hoy Duba Wewing Ranga EXT SIB AIR Vinwing Ranae EX METAR Dota Viewing Finnun TSH Serfnoo Doto Vimeing Ranga TSEHH Garion Dota Tien 24 HR Fre Lvl Dati Vinwina Renan FI Winds loft Ueta Viewing Rome VSWHH piezep y 29 gt lt O e T E e rar sounjeo EUONIPPY G 29 D Winds Ala t Altiteda County Doti Viewing Ranga Cyclone min Viewing Raman
77. active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Runway Extension option S 2 Tum the small MED knob to change the highlighted value WY 4 oj 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted m Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 3 38 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN INT NDB Viewing Range The INT NDB viewing range option selects whether Intersection and NDB information is shown on the Navigation Map Intersection and NDB information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 15 NM is selected INT NDBs will be shown at map ranges of 15 NM and lower duit Lean pasas ING RANGE TON INT NOG VIEWING RANGE WOR VIENING RANSE CLASS arma CLASS C TCA Figure 3 54 arigato Map INT NDB Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the INT NDB option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the l
78. and right of the zero Sec 7 Symbols The Slip Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration Slip skid is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer One bar displacement as shown below is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip Skid Indicator Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 2 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Roll Pointer Roll Scale Zero DJOM9JOJ m Slip Skid Indicator ET Ry Wass 298 Figure 2 13 Slip Skid Indication The standby mechanical Attitude Indicator in your aircraft is either a Ground E Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration The GDU 620 Attitude Indicator has E been configured in either a Ground Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration to match the configuration of your aircrafts standby Attitude Indicator Ground Sky Pointer mode is configured during installation and can not be changed by the pilot 29 _ D In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Ground Pointer the pointer lt above the Roll Scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the Roll Scale Zero Pointer pointing towards the ground 2E Roll Pointer Roll Scale Zero Pointer Roll Scale gt 3 D SJOqW S L 298 Figure 2 14 Attitude Indicator with a Ground Pointer
79. appear without altitude separation or climb descent information 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 4 7 22 A GARMIN 4 8 3 TIS Limitations NOTE This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive Garmin recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual Section 1 3 5 g TISis NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no amp Visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance In other words the information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC TIS will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed Sec4 5 o 2 No as lt 255 TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar which is a secondary 3 surveillance radar similar to the ATCRBS TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering TIS is
80. be used as an airport moving map display AMMD SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations Index 5 18 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 4 1 Using SafeTaxi Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SaleTaxi lt airport layout within the maximum configured range The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen e Navigation Map Page NDB Information Page Weather Datalink Page VOR Information Page Airport Information Page User Waypoint Information Page Intersection Information Page During ground operations the aircrafts position is displayed in reference to taxiways runways and airport features When panning over the airport features such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown Fw 5 4 1 1 Decluttering The DCLTR soft key declutter label advances to DCLTR 1 DCLTR 2 and 2 DCLTR 3 each time the soft key is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level Selecting the DCLTR soft key removes the taxiway markings and airport feature labels Selecting the DCLTR 1 soft key removes VOR station ID the VOR symbol and intersection names if within the airport plan view Selecting the DCLTR 2 soft key removes the airport runway layout unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure Pressing the
81. can display weather radar from a Garmin GWX system or from selected 3rd party radars Only one weather radar system may be interfaced to the system For detailed information on the operation of 3rd party radars refer 2 to their specific documentation 4 10 1 Garmin GWX 68 Radar Description 7 The Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a four color digital pulsed radar with 6 5 kilowatts of power It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high definition target display The pulse Width is four microseconds on all ranges except the 2 5 NM range The GWX 68 Z uses a one microsecond pulse width at this range to reduce the smearing of targets on the display This allows better target definition at close range To focus radar scanning on specific areas Sector Scanning offers pilot adjustable horizontal scan angles of 20 40 60 or 90 A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops gradients and cell buildup activity at s various altitudes Other features include Extended Sensitivity Time Control STC logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with intensity so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer e WATCH Weather Attenuated Color Highlight which helps identity possible shadowing effects of short range cell activity identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipi
82. configuration in a left turn In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Sky Pointer the pointer below the roll scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the Roll Pointer pointing towards the sky y xipueddy Alesso 5 8 29S Xepul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 9 A GARMIN Roll Scale Zero Pointer Roll Pointer Roll Scale Foreword E E gt ME Figure 2 15 Attitude Indicator with a Sky Pointer configuration in a left turn 2 3 1 Extreme Attitude Extreme attitude is defined as a roll greater than 65 left or right 30 pitch up or 20 pitch down Red chevrons are displayed at greater than 50 pitch up and 30 pitch down The PFD will declutter when the aircraft enters an extreme attitude Only the primary functions will be displayed in these situations The following information is removed from the PFD and corresponding soft keys are disabled when the aircraft is in an unusual attitude PFD Knob Mode Annunciations Sec 3 MFD Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Ground Speed True Airspeed and Airspeed Units e Selected Altitude Barometer Settings and Selected Vertical Speed Sec 5 Additional Features e Vertical Course Deviation Indicator e Traffic and Terrain Annunciations Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Flight Director Command Bars e Radar Altimeter digital readout e Marker beacon annunciation Sec 7 Symbols e Fast Sl
83. dealer for on AHRS service Heading data is o fs unreliable HDG LOST HDG features disabled or defaulted to GPS1 TRK GDU is in the reversionary track F based mode 6 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Alert Message lt LRU gt CONFIG lt LRU gt COOLING lt LRU gt DB ERR lt LRU gt KEYSTK lt LRU gt SERVICE lt LRU gt VOLTAGE 190 00601 02 Rev F Description Error in the configuration of a specific LRU where LRU denotes a specific LRU such as GDL69 or GWX LRU has poor cooling Reducing power usage by dimming display LRU database error exists where LRU database denotes the specific unit database lt LRU gt KEY Is stuck The LRU has detected the KEY key as stuck where LRU and KEY denote a specific LRU and key lt LRU gt needs service Contact repair facility LRU has low voltage Reducing power usage by dimming display where lt LRU gt denotes the specific LRU and power is being reduced Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide Action Contig service required Contact your Garmin dealer for service Specitic LRU has poor cooling where lt LRU gt denotes the specific 5 LRU and power is being reduced Contact your Garmin dealer for service Replace or update database Contact your Garmin dealer for service Specific LRU should be serviced where LRU denotes the specifi
84. detailed sections for the chart for those topics A aircraft icon will show in the lower right corner of the display if your aircraft is in the chart area The icon will have an x through it if the aircraft is not in the chart area or the GPS fix is lost DJOMeJO 7 Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart UJa1s g 29 C 298 ddd JN 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH V 29S TI t te e a 72 Jeuonippy SLaly 9 unuuy 9 29S y xipuaddy IeSSO D sioquJ S 9 9S S Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 15 A GARMIN 5 3 HliteCharts FliteCharts resemble the paper version of FAA published terminal procedures charts The charts are displayed with high resolution and in color for applicable charts S FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin Available data NVA inclu des e Arrivals STAR Departure Procedures DP Approaches c Airport Diagrams 53 1 Cycle Number and Revision cc FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days Charts are still viewable during a i 2 period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date When turning on the GDU 620 the Power up page indicates any of five different possible criteria for chart availability These indicati
85. for c 5 uc lt effectivity System is verifying chart yE database when new cycle is installed for the first time After verifying chart database is found to be corrupt ChartView will not be available Table 5 1 Power up Page Annunciations and Definitions The ChartView time criticalinformation can also be found on the AUX System Status page The database CYCLE number EXPIRES and DISABLES dates of the g ChartView database appear in either blue or yellow text When the ChartView 4 EXPIRES date is reached ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later This is shown as the DISABLES date When the DISABLES date is reached charts are no longer available for viewing rts E Select the DBASE soft key for scrolling through the database information Scroll through the database with the MFD knob or ENT key The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen ChartView is an 2 optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Refer to Jeppesen Databases in Appendix A for instructions on revising the ChartView database Ind 5 12 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 2 2 Viewing Chart Details in ChartView A NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will T automatically be selected z c2 A NOTE Chart details are only available for instrument approach procedure charts Chart details are not available for airport diagrams or
86. four areas the Active Channel Available Channels Category of the highlighted Channel and the Volume setting The Active Channel window shows the Channel Name and Number Artist Song Title and Category 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page o T A C w Figure 3 81 XM Entertainment Radio A description of Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is provided in Section 5 Additional Features 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 61 A GARMIN 3 4 4 System Status The System Status Page displays the statuses serial numbers and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks failed LRUs by red Xs Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin authorized dealer informed LRU INFO STATUS SERIAL HURBER VERSIOH nic rr ME 1 DDU 1 LRU Info Window DDU Z CHU ERS DA pA AMIATION REDIOMN AVIATION CYCLE Database Window BMIATION EFFECTIVE i AMIATION EXPIRES Scroll Bar DESTACLE REGION DESTACLE VERSION DBGTACLE CYCLE DESTACLE EFFECTIVE DAS TACLE EXPIRES SYSTEM STATUS LRU Soft Key EEE E s uin Database Soft Key Figure 3 82 LRU and Database Information 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the System Status page 3 Press
87. in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications North of 70 North latitude and south of 70 South latitude An area north of 65 North latitude and between longitude 75 West and 120 West An area north of 70 North latitude and between longitude 70 West and 128 West An area north of 70 North latitude and between longitude 85 East and 114 West An area south of 55 South latitude between longitude 120 East and 165 East 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide li 5 gt w Li AN A GARMIN WARNING Do not use Terrain SVT information for primary terrain avoidance Terrain SVT is intended only to enhance situational awareness CAUTION The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Portions of the Garmin GDU 620 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID NAVAID Therefore as with all NAVAIDs information presented by the GDU 620 can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe CAUTION The Garmin GDU 620 does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot s authority to operate this device under FAA FCC regulations CAUTION The GDU 6
88. key labels The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function zo o U D a WY Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Key Sec 8 Glossary Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Appendix A Soft Key Not Available Unselected Soft Key For Selection Appendix B Index BACK Soft Key Labels Figure 2 4 PFD Soft Key Layout 2 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN When a soft key is selected its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned off at which time it reverts to white text on black background When a soft key function is disabled the soft key label is subdued dimmed Soft keys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity NOTE If a soft key is pressed and held for longer than 1 second it is 5 ignored ddd C 92S AP Test The AP TEST soft key is available if the GAD 43 is used to provide attitude information to an autopilot The AP TEST soft key disengages the autopilot as part of the GAD 43 test CDI The CDI soft key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR LOC as the gt _ _ active navigation source In a single GDU 620 system the GDU CDI soft key will change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620 Ina dual GDU 620 _ system
89. knob to the Phone Number field Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the number and then turn the large MFD knob to select the next character When the number is complete press the ENT key IRIDIUM PHONE FHOME STATUS DALL SUPPRESSION FHONEBODK m T ios aes Entry Number SOME MUHEER S397 SAT g WOLE 111 OO TARDO CU ai i ah JEN Press To Use Keys o For Number Entry Figure 3 98 Phone Book Number Entry 2 Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 73 A GARMIN Creating Phone Numbers with Soft Keys 1 Numbers may also be entered using the soft keys at the bottom of the display Press the Keys key at the bottom of the display IRIDIUM PHONE ns Press To Use Keys n ias SOVISURT I For Number Entry Figure 3 99 Phone Book Number Entry Using Hot Keys 2 Press the key for the group of desired numbers TRIDTUA PHONE Ix ALT MIENNE DIM 1234 5h78 Shen ADVISORY Press for Press for Press for numbers 1 numbers 5 numbers 9 and 2 3 and4 6 7 and8 0 and symbols and Figure 3 100 Selecting Numeric Groups for Phone Book Number Entry 3 Press the key for the desired number Repeat as necessary and then press ENT when the number is complete Press Keys For Number Entry Figure 3 101 Selecting Individual Numbers for Phone Book Number Entry Selecting a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 Press the s
90. leSsO D sioquJ S SAV 9 9 28g S unuuy 9 29S Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 21 A GARMIN Topo Scale The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical features on the Navigation Map is displayed The scale will be located on the right side of the display Minimum Maximum ELEV FT Range of Topography Displayed on the Map Foreword Sec 1 System Sky Indication Sec 2 PFD Range of Topography Displayed on the Map Current Aircraft Altitude Current Ground Level Indication b 2 lt eo D N O T M oO ES lt L Figure 3 29 Navigation Map Topo Scale 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Topo Scale option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off NAVIGATION HAP 1 S Features Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT AUTO ZOOH Sec 8 Glossary LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE El Appendix A Index Appendix B Figure 3 30 Navigation Map Topo Scale Selection 3 22 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the sm
91. next character When finished selecting the waypoint name press ENT Sec System Sec 2 PFD WAYPOINT INFORMATION IDENT FACILITY CITY Sec 3 MFD g es N S lt Features LOCATION Annun amp Alerts BRO DIS Sec 7 Symbols Figure 4 102 Waypoint GFDS Data Request UO The Waypoint box will be checked and weather information will be requested around the selected waypoint for the range selected next operation Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 4 110 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Diameter Route Width GFDS Data Request 1 After selecting a coverage option in the previous section the Diameter Route lt Width field will now be highlighted GFOS IMTA REQUEST COVERAGE PRESENT POSITION DESTINATION FLIGHT PUAN WATPODNT DIAMETER ATE WIDTH AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE etae REQUEST Figure 4 103 Waypoint GFDS Data Request Range gt z T E e rar pJezey 7 29 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Diameter Route Width and then press ENT ae 4 11 5 2 GFDS Data Request Auto Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Auto Request Update Rate 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Off or an Update Rate When finished 35 selecting the Update Rate press ENT The Update Rate will default to OFF at each power cycle UPDATE RATE TIEF MAJAL REQUEST Figure 4 104 GFDS Data
92. now be displayed 5 With the Bearing value still highlighted the small MFD Knob may be used to move the scanned slice a few degrees right or left 6 Press the RNG keys to adjust the range 7 Press the MFD Knob to remove the cursor 8 To select a new area to be vertically scanned select the HORIZON soft key to return to the Horizontal Scan view and repeat the previous steps 4 10 6 3 Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell the radar beam should be pointed at the wet part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity color level The ideal aiming point is just below the freezing level of the storm The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature The antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan 4 94 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Horizontal Scan Display 1 Press the MFD knob 2 With the Tilt value highlighted in the Control window turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Tilt TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 80 Adjusting Tilt Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Vertical Scan Display Not available with all radars 1 While in the Vertical Scan view press the CONTROL and then the TILT soft keys This displays the Tilt Line OR
93. of the precipitation droplets With this in mind the following interpretations can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin Sec 4 5 te No ae lt n areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta indicating large amounts of precipitation the turbulence is considered severe Areasthat show steep color gradients intense color changes over thin bands or short distances suggest irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence as well as heavy precipitation Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity Along squall lines multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line individual cells may be in different stages of development Areas between closely spaced intense targets may contain developing clouds not having enough moisture to produce a return However these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence appearing as hooks fingers or scalloped edges These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow red or magenta areas and should be treated as highly dangerous areas Avoid these areas as if they were red or magenta areas 4 88 Garm
94. or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the North Up At option Sec 2 PFD No x Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value MaA E A UREENTATION HORTH UP AT Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 3 18 Navigation Map North Up At Orientation Range Selection Sec 7 Symbols 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 3 14 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Auto Zoom With a valid flight plan the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the Navigation Map range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the flight plan If enabled it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range when the aircraft is on the ground Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by manually zooming with the RNG keys or enabling OBS mode Auto Zoom is re enabled once one of the following conditions is met DJOM9JOJ UJ91s g 29S 1 A waypoint is sequenced ddd C 298 2 the aircraft transitions from on ground to in air 3 a point is reached where the
95. range 2 6 STAB 4 98 Stabilization 4 91 4 98 STAR 5 10 5 16 Stationary front 4 71 Sunny 4 52 B 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Surface analysis 4 51 4 70 7 5 Surface data 4 50 4 71 Surface data time 4 50 4 72 Surface winds 4 66 4 120 Symbols 4 18 4 35 4 41 4 50 4 52 2 44 7 1 Synchronization 1 20 1 21 3 50 3 55 3 56 Syn Terr 2 4 Synthetic Vision v 2 4 3 12 3 28 4 27 4 30 5 1 5 37 Synthetic Vision alerts 4 30 Syn Vis 2 4 System description 1 1 System display units 1 20 3 50 3 59 System power 1 4 1 11 1 13 System settings 1 20 3 50 System status 3 2 3 3 3 62 4 9 4 25 4 36 4 45 5 12 6 10 T TACAN 7 1 TAF 3 9 3 87 4 68 4 122 TAS 3 35 4 32 4 91 5 1 5 44 TAWS alerts 4 11 4 17 4 18 TAWS B 4 1 4 10 TAWS failure alert 4 25 TAWS SVT 4 1 4 27 TAWS system test 4 12 4 15 4 25 TCA 3 12 3 42 Temperature 1 20 1 22 2 28 3 59 4 52 Temperature probe 1 1 1 2 1 5 2 28 Terrain 1 10 1 22 2 10 3 1 3 16 3 20 4 1 4 4 4 10 4 27 4 44 4 84 4 100 7 3 Terrain alerts 4 4 4 24 4 27 4 30 4 31 5 37 Terrain data 3 12 3 23 4 8 4 9 4 10 A 4 Terrain obstacle symbols 4 13 7 3 Terrain proximity ii 1 22 4 1 4 4 4 12 7 4 Terrain scale 3 12 3 24 4 6 Terrain SVT iv 4 1 4 27 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN TFR 3 4 3 12 3 36 3 47 7 6 Thunderstorms 4 52 4 78 4 83 4 87 4 88 4 90 Time 1 20 1 21 3 17 3 50 3 57 4 48
96. service and the call may not be made 7 The GSR 56 is dialing the called number 3 70 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is allowed 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Iridium Phone page 2 Press the small MFD knob to select the Call Suppression type Status Description Off Call Suppression is turned off Calls may be transmitted and received through the Iridium phone Call Suppression is turned on The incoming call pop up will not be shown The call may still be answered on the phone page Outgoing calls are not affected On During APR Call Suppression is turned on during Approach Missed Approach MAPR TERM and Terminal operations The incoming call pop up will not be shown The call may still be answered on the phone page Outgoing calls are not affected Table 3 7 Call Suppression 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired selection IRIDIUM PHONE STATUS DALL TIME PHONE STATUS CALL SUPPRESSION PHONES HAHE PHONE NUHBER Figure 3 95 Select Call Suppression 4 Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 71 A GARMIN 3 4 7 2 Managing the Phone Book The Phone Book is stored on the SD card in the bottom slot The Phone Book v will onl
97. shown Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays TI 0 te e 1 ua Jeuonippy S y 8 unuuv 9 298 Obstacles sioquJ S L 29 leSSO D 8 29S Obstacle Pop Up UB TERA Th I TFF E EAE D l teh i gt FELIE HI Pns FHA i ce PRS ELT Pe Pe gt x lt HAMIGATION MAP 1 gt Figure 5 48 Obstacle Depiction on MFD Ec R 2 gt x lt UJ 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 45 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 1 Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B GARMIN 5 7 3 8 Field of View The PFD Field of View can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image Two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the MFD with an angle of approximately 50 represent the forward horizontal field of view shown on the PFD Foreword PFD System MFD amp Alerts V Shaped Lines Depict PFD Field of View angle Is approx 50 Appendix A Index HAVIGATION HAP 1 DOLTR Figure 5 49 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison 5 46 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN To configure the Field 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map Page Group press the of View MENU key to display the PAGE MENU Measure Bearing Distance Press the MFD knob to return to bose poge PAGE MENU Figure 5 50 Page Menu 2 Press the ENT key to bring u
98. that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA a symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder 25 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 35 A GARMIN 4 7 4 X Traffic System Status NOTE Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the self test and operating modes The traffic mode is indicated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page Traffic Display Enabled Icon Other Maps Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Map Page Mode TAS Self test Initiated TAS Operating TAS Standby also shown in white in center of page TAS Failed If the unit fails an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page Sec 4 5 o g N S ae lt Table 4 13 TAS Modes Traffic Map Page Annunciation Description Data is not being received from the TAS unit Data is being received from the TAS unit but the unit is self reporting a failure Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit Table 4 14 TAS Failure Annunciations 4 36 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed Traffic Status Banner Annunciation Description A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the se
99. the CDI keys in the navigator will be disabled EL The 1 2 soft key toggles between the available receivers for selected navigation source i e GPS1 and GPS2 or VOR LOC and VOR LOC2 This soft key 3 5 will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR LOC ZS or Pressing the PFD soft key displays the SYN VIS DME BRG and BACK soft keys The DME and SYN VIS soft keys will only be present if the system is 2 v configured for these features o BRG1 The BRGI soft key cycles through the available bearing 1 indicator modes NAVI GPS1 ADE or None BRG2 The BRG2 soft key cycles through the available bearing 2 indicator modes NAV2 GPS2 ADE or None This soft key will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR LOC 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 3 Ila Hazara ditional Fe nnun amp Alerts O CD O LL QD WU X O uu Uv co m w NM Y EE di J LL v Un atures Symbols A GARMIN DME The DME NAV soit keys select the DME submenu For some installations the DME NAV soit keys simply toggle the DME display on off as the submenu options will not exist The availability of the DME controls vary based on the installation The DME NAV soit keys select NAV 1 or 2 as the DME tuning source If this soft key is pressed again when already selected the DME display is removed from the PFD
100. the CLR key returns to the currently viewed page OR Press the ENT key accesses the Terrain SVT Page Sec4 lt b o g Ns E lt TERRAIN 1DRU TlBDDOrT SEA E et Ben WAVIGATION HAP 4 HAP Figure 4 27 Terrain SVT Advisory Pop Up on the MFD 4 30 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Alert Type PFD MFD Alert Aural Message Annunciation GPS signal re established Terrain System Available Terrain System Test Successtul Terrain System test OK A Terrain System Test in Progress TER TEST Terrain Alerting is disabled TER INH 2d No GPS position Terrain System Not Available Excessively degraded GPS signal Terrain SVT System Test Fail o CR Terrain System Failure Table 4 9 Terrain SVT System Test Status Annunciations pJezey Y 29 o z a T E e a gt Alert Type PFD MFD Alert Aural Message Annunciation EU Caution Terrain Terrain L RTC C ITI C re Warning Terrain Terrain gt 0 FLTA Obstacle Caution 2 ROC C IOI C BE Caution Obstacle Obstacle FLTA Obstacle Warning ROC W IOI W OBSTACLE Warning Obstacle Obstacle Table 4 10 Terrain SVT Alerts Summary 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 31 A GARMIN 4 7 TAS Traffic Optional TAS refers to an active Traffic Advisory System that may be optionally displayed on the PFD and or MFD The TAS is installed separately from the G600 s
101. the LRU soft key to highlight the first item in the LRU Info window 24 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the items in the LRU Info window in case more items are available than are displayed If more items are available than can be displayed in the window a scroll bar will show on the right side of the window 5 Press the DBASE soft key to highlight the first item in the Database window 6 Turn the small or large MFD knobs to scroll through the items in the Database window in case more items are available than are displayed If more items are available than can be displayed in the window a scroll bar will show on the right side of the window 3 02 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 5 External Video optional External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an externally mounted video source on the aircratt 3 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Aux page group 2 The External Video page is the first page in the Aux page group 2 a Display of External Video Source e Current Zoom Level 2 CURRENT D 7 BRIGHTNESS SU Current Setup Values For essai The Selected Video Source TEM batis l0N gt 4 EXTER VIDEO r i 2520 DEN VIDEO 2 sait ADVISORY Video Source Selections Video Source Setup 2 8 Figure 3 83 External Video 3 4 5 1 Select Video Source E If more than one video source is available the Video 1 and Video 2 soft keys will be available at
102. the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Lat Lon option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 27 DJOM9JOJ cn NN cr D 3 ddd C 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S s y 9 Saunjeo4 8 29S 28 euonppy Xopu g xipueddy WN MD C Uhuuv 9 298 7 29 G 29 A GARMIN Field of View The PFD Field of View used for the Synthetic Vision Technology SVI option when enabled can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image Two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the MFD represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD E d NAVIGATION HAP 1 5 eur Mnn DE ae ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT AUTO 200H LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH 7 WIND VECTOR On SRS NAV RANGE RING On TOPO DATA On TOPO SCALE On nS TERRAIN DATA On 8 g TERRAIN SCALE On OBSTACLE VIEWING RANGE SUNN LAT LON VIEWING RANGE 2n FIELD OF VIEW Sec 6 N cow 3 G T oj Pi iE k
103. the TRND ACK soft key is equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for one second Pressing the CAPTURE soft key is equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for five seconds Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and ADAS ETM documentation for the system description and operating procedures Alert Message Description ADC1 ALT EC ADC Altitude e Contact your Garmin dealer for Error Correction Is service unavailable The alert is enabled and the GDC is reporting that altitude correction is unavailable 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 6 1 Alert Message AHRS1 2 SRVC 2 AHRS1 2 TAS 6 2 Description AHRS1 2 not receiving any GPS information AHRS1 2 operating exclusively in no GPS reversionary mode AHRS1 2 using backup GPS source AHRS1 2 not receiving backup GPS information Two GPS devices are configured as present and AHRS1 is not recelving GPS data from the backup 2nd device AHRS1 2 magnetic field model needs update Appears on ground only AHRS1 2 not receiving true airspeed from ADC Displayed heading and attitude data is still valid Additional loss of GPS data will cause loss of heading and attitude data Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Action e Verity navigators are on and have a GPS signal and are not in self test mode Check AFMS for limitations Contact your Garmin dealer for service AHRS magnetic fi
104. the bottom of the display TUM B 1 Press the Video 1 soft key to select Video 1 source for viewing and setup 2 Press the Video 2 soft key to select Video 2 source for viewing and setup x 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 63 A GARMIN 3 4 5 2 Zoom 1 While viewing the External Video function press the Up Rng Arrow key to increase the zoom up to 10x magnification Zoom level is made through digital magnification m 2 Press the Down Rng Arrow key to decrease the zoom level down to a minimum of 1x 3 4 5 3 Panning 1 While viewing the External Video function press the small MFD knob to activate panning Turn the small MFD knob clockwise to pan up the map will move down Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to pan down the map will move up Turn the large MFD knob clockwise to pan to the right the map will move left 5 Turn the large MFD knob counterclockwise to pan to the left the map will move right 5 6 Press the small MED knob to exit panning 3 4 5 4 Setup The display of each video source is set up individually 1 While viewing the External Video page press the soft key for the desired Video source Video 1 or Video 2 bs 2 Press the Setup soft key 3 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Use the following directions for each value CURRENT BRIGHTHESS CONTRAST SATURATION EXTERNAL VIDEO VIDEO 1 asa SETUPS ADVISORY F
105. the features available The soft key Alerts is present on the far right position in all MFD displays KS NavMap1 Declutter Map Traffic Topo Terrain NavMap2 Declutter Map Traffic Topo Terrain Split Screen Traffic Standby Operate Alt Mode Standby Operate Alt Mode Below Normal Above Unrest Terrain View 360 Arc Inhibit 190 00601 02 Rev F Wx Data Link 1 Legend SRFC Time Wind Down Wind Up Wx Data Link 2 Legend SRFC Time Wind Down Wind Up Wx Data Link 3 Legend SRFC Time Wind Down Wind Up Wx Radar Mode Control Horizon Vertical Back External Video Active Fpl System Setup infa Default Unit Wpt Info Default Speed XM Info Rwy Freq Lock Apt Dir XM Radio ui Channel Charts dM NOTAM Category Header CAT Plan CAT Profile ALL Minimums Volume Mute Select Vol Presets PS1 TRND ACK 0645 CAPTURE System Status BACK LRU DBASE Position Reporting Send Iridium Telephone Dial Answer Hang Up Vol Keys Figure 3 3 MFD Soft Keys Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 9 A GARMIN 3 3 Navigation Map Pages Map displays are used extensively in the GDU 620 to provide situational awareness in flight The Navigation map pages can display the following information _ Airports NAVAIDs airspace e Aircraft icon representing present z 5 airways land data highways position cities lakes rivers borders etc e Nav range ring with names
106. the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards The following equipment is required to perform the update e Windows compatible PC computer Windows 2000 XP Vista or Windows 7 recommended e SanDisk SD Card Reader P Ns SDDR 93 or SDDR 99 or equivalent card reader Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site Existing Supplemental Database SD Card P N 010 00769 xx It may be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service facility in order to use certain database features Updating Garmin Databases 1 Download the data to the data cards trom the appropriate web site 2 Insert the Database SD card in an empty card slot of the GDU 620 The SD card containing the ChartView FliteCharts SafeTaxi or any other database except for the Jeppesen Aviation Database is typically inserted into the lower slot on the GDU 620 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A 5 A 6 A GARMIN Apply power to the G600 System View the MFD power up splash screen Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the splash screen When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases an in progress message may be seen If this message is present wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding Some databases can take up to 15 minutes to update Acknowledge the Power up Page agreement by pressing the ENT key or the right most soft key If a database is highlighted in yellow it is ei
107. the range selection example below where 30 NM is selected obstacles will be shown at map ranges of 30 NM and lower Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Height is less than Height is less than Height is greater Height is greater than 1000 feet AGL 1000 feet AGL than 1000 feet AGL 1000 feet AGL Potential Impact Point oo Projected Flight Path _ n 4 100 ft Threshold T Unlighted Obstacle Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Obstacles Within 1000 feet of Aircraft Obstacles Within 100 feet of Aircraft or Above Figure 3 37 Navigation Map Obstacle Data 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 25 UJa1s g pJOM9JO ddd C 298 adi 29S 92UPDIOAV sainjeo4 euonippy y xipueddy ieSSO D sioquJ S s y 9 unuuy G 29S X PU g xipueddy 2S piezeH 7 29 298 8 295 9 29 Sec 2 Sec 1 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Sec 7 Annun Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Foreword PFD OD E n Features amp Alerts Appendix A Index A GARMIN 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Obstacle Data option No x Turn the small MFD knob to select the viewing range or Off
108. the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 3 18 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Nav Range Ring When turned on the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass rose around your present position on the Navigation Map The relative size shown on the map will remain the same 2596 of the map range Range Ring Radius Range Ring with Compass Rose Figure 3 25 Navigation Map Range Ring 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Nav Range Ring option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off NAVIGATION RAP 1 SETUP NORTH UP AT LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH NAV RANGE RING ls T Figure 3 26 Navigation Map Range Ring Selection 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 19 zu o pJOM3J Wass 39S ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUEpIOAV piezeH SoJn eo jeuonippy y xipueddy Alesso 5 sioqu S Suelv 8 2 29g 29S unuuv G
109. thus obscuring some landmarks Cities normally provide a strong return signal While large buildings and _ Structures provide good returns small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings As the aircraft approaches and shorter ranges are selected details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and edges of the city become more defined Bodies of water such as lakes rivers and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good returns The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned They can appear as dark areas on the display However rough or choppy water is a better reflector and will provide stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves Sec 4 5 te No lt Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna but also block the areas behind However over mountainous terrain the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off canyon walls using up all or most of the radar energy In this case no return signal is received from this area causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists 4 10 2 3 Angle of Incidence The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence Incident angle A is illustrated below This directly affects the detectable range
110. time until the next data transmission This field is blank when the aircratt is on the ground POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRAMSHIT zc Countdown Time Until Transmit REPORTING STATUS Figure 3 89 Position Reporting Time Until Transmit Position Reporting Status Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircratt is in the air Status Description The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at this time The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing A position report is currently being transmitted Unavailable The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system E Table 3 5 Position Reporting Status 3 4 6 2 Report Type Standard When the Standard reporting type is used the Position Reporting Period may be set to Off or Automatic The Automatic Position Reporting Period can be set 3 to intervals of 2 to 60 minutes 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 67 A GARMIN 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Position Reporting page 2 2 Press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Standard and then press the ENT key POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 90 Select Standard Reporting 4 The Position Reporting Period type will now be selected Turn the small MFD knob t
111. value POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT Eb REPORTING STATUS utt SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 94 Select AFF Reporting Period Frequency 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 69 A GARMIN 3 4 7 iridium Phone Operation Optional Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium 5 satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56 4 CAUTION When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver only one SD card may be present in the GDU 620 and it must be in the lower slot 3 4 7 1 Status The Status section shows the Call Time Phone Status and Call Suppression selected The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current call using the Iridium phone Phone Status shows the current operating status of the Iridium phone Status Description M The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating is at this time The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing l The GSR 56 is connected to the called number Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called number Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56 Hanging Up The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call co S Unavailable The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system Table 3 6 Iridium Phone Status Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing The phone is in use by another
112. ze v z amp AE Volume Bar Graph Volume Soft Key Label Nn w El gt rm a gt ab LL c x lt Figure 5 23 XM Radio Volume mesi 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the VOL soft 255 key 2 Press the VOL or VOL soft keys or turn the small MFD knob to adjust the P radio volume Xt A Volume Bar Graph z E Volume Soft Key Labels D Figure 5 24 XM Radio Volume Controls 3 Press MUTE to mute the radio volume Press MUTE again or the VOL or VOL soft keys to unmute the radio volume Appendix A He Appendix B Index 5 28 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 5 3 4 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets The PRESET soit key allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected 5 preset position for easy later recall A delay of several seconds can occur when setting or recalling a preset ploma 29S Active Channel Number and Name Wass V TI O C 29 Z Active Channel S w and Song Title D S I TE Feature Tip BUT ETA IT 32 Preset Soft Keys ps Figure 5 25 XM Radio Presets QD 252 Setting a Preset doo 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group you may set a preset for the Active Channel Press the PRESETS soft key 2 Press and hold a preset soft key such as PS1 sioquJ S 29 3 Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets Alesso 5 8 29S
113. 0 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 7 5 X Inhibiting Enabling TAWS Alerting TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA FLTA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode 304 Ul91s g 29 A NOTE See AFMS for guidance on inhibiting TAWS TERRAIN did Z 285 16HHFT 1 6H6HFT TAWS INH Figure 4 20 TAWS Alerting Disabled TAWS Inhibited Annunciation PFD amp MFD dij 295 pJezey 7 29 gt z T E e rar 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page 2 Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable TAWS choice dependent on current state OR 1 Press the MENU key 2 Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight Inhibit TAWS or Enable TAWS choice dependent on current state and press the ENT key nea euonipp G 235 Sol 9 235 SLaly 8 UNUUVY S OQUIAS 29 4 4 7 6 Five Hundred Aural Alert The purpose of the aural alert message Five hundred is to provide an advisory alert that the aircraft is 500 feet above terrain When the aircraft descends within 500 feet of terrain the aural message Five hundred is generated There are no display annunciations or pop up alerts that accompany the aural message URSSOID g 286 y xipueddy NOTE Th
114. 0 Pilot s Guide 4 75 A GARMIN Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Winds Aloft will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selected word FO 5 amp Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower DATA LIK SETUP ES Han Orinntntion Track up AB NEXRAD Data Vievin Rona Off NEXRAD Lesend On Echo Tor Doti Viewing Ronse SHH oOo Cloud Top Duba Viewina Ronga Off 2S Liwhthine Bete Viewinw fenan EHI Call Hey Drita View EI KE SIGATA Winwing Ronan 3g HH Lm BRUT Br IT Surface Dutu Viewing Ronee 158tn Surfoen Onto Time 24 HR Sec 4 S r N O S E T 2 lt L T a Fre Lvl Dibo Viewing Runge ZU HH mn SW 2 2 Binds Alakt Data Virwlag Ronge ADS t LL Winds Aloft Altitude County Onta A Rage Cyclon Duta Viewing Range wow S E yes D uc Prose ha MED brnk non Figure 4 63 Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range Selection Sec 7 Symbols 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to
115. 00 ft AGL 1000 ft AGL Figure 7 1 Obstacle Altitude Color Correlation Ll Potential Impact Point Projected Flight Path 100 ft y d Unlighted Obstacle Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Figure 7 2 TERRAIN Altitude Color Correlation nippy G 28g euo unuuy O 29 S Sualv 8 G O WN un a n IE y Xipueddy Pl A JOV xepul g xipue 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 3 4 A GARMIN 7 5 Basemap Symbols Symbol Description oe Interstate Highway o State Highway ti nie ce wen Table 7 4 Basemap Symbols 46 Map Tool Bar Symbols Symbol Description EE Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator jfi Enabled and Available Indicator a ei Enabled and Not Available Indicator Table 7 5 Map Tool Bar Symbols Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 7 71 XMWeather Tool Bar Symbols Description fF NEXRAD j Cloud Top Cloud Top and Echo Top 3 4 Mutually Exclusive 3 Echo Top Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually 259919 E 8B m 0 0 Table 7 6 XM Weather Tool Bar Symbols e ddd 9S JS I Ippy euo unuuy O 29 S suely 8 G O IE y xipueddy ul zl n JAY X PU g xIpu 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 5 A GARMIN 7 8 Miscellaneous Symbols Symbol Description E Default Aircraft o
116. 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 99 gt D a D pieze 7 29 A GARMIN 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU Key 2 Toactivate or deactivate Weather Alerts turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight either Enable Weather Alert or Inhibit Weather Alert 4 10 7 Ground Mapping and Interpretation A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain This can be a useful tool for verifying aircraft position A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode Different colors are also used to represent the intensity levels The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the following table Use of the GAIN and TILT controls will help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily As previously discussed the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity displayed Sec4 Hazard idanc Avo Ground Map Mode Color 3rd Party Radars GWX Radars Intensity T gt 0dB to lt 9 dB 9 dB to lt 18 dB 2 18 dB to 27 dB 3 and above 27 dB and greater Not Used Table 4 24 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels INC Figure 4 89 GWX Radar Ground Mode Scale 3rd Party Radar Ground Mode
117. 1 GDUI and GDU2 if the copilot has GPS1 displayed on the CDI Similarly if the pilot selects GPS2 on the CDI and GNS2 is in OBS mode any course changes will move the OBS on GNS2 GDUI and GDU2 if the copilot has GPS2 displayed on the CDI AHRS 1 and ADC 1 will only be displayed on GDUI AHRS2 and ADC2 will e rm Tec gt only be displayed on GDU2 The CDI soft key toggles between selection of GPS or VOR LOC as the active 23 navigation source In a single GDU 620 system the GDU CDI soft key will change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the A i jun navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620 In a dual GDU 620 system the CDI 3 z Keysi in the navigator are disabled 3 56 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 1 6 Date and Time The Date and Time options allow you to select the time to change UTC time to local time with a time offset DATE TIME DATE TIME TIME FORMAT TIME OFFSET Figure 3 73 Time Format and Offset Time Zone Local Standard Time Local Daylight Savings Offset Time Offset Table 3 4 U S Time Zone Offsets 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Time Format 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Local 12hr Local 24hr or UTC and then press ENT When Local 12 or 24 hour mode is selected the Time Offse
118. 1 MFD Description The nose of the aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are based on information received from the currently selected GPS navigator The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map The other legs are shown in white y xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 1 ad 98 7 29S G 29S 9 29 A GARMIN There are 28 different map ranges available from 500 feet to 2000 NM The current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the map and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the map To change the gt map range on any map press the RNG keys on the right side of the bezel 3 4 Functional Display Map Turn large MFD knob to change page groups Map Group Wx Group opt Aux Group FPL Group af Ext Video opt Active FPL System Setup Wx Data 2 opt Wpt Info ait Screen opt Wx Data 3 ast XM Info opt Charts opt Turn small MFD knob to select pages within a group Traffic opt Weather Radar opt XM Radio opt Terrain TAWS SVT opt System Status Pos Report opt Iridium Phone opt Figure 3 2 MFD Page Groups 3 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 2 MFD Soft Key Map The soft keys available depend on the page displayed and
119. 2 Press 1 2 soft key to toggle between the 1 and 2 navigators of the GPS or VOR q LOC sources 3 Verity the navigation source by the indication on the HSI and in the upper left corner of the PFD NOTE The selected navigator is the active navigator for all PFD and MFD operations except for the supplemental bearing pointers 2 7 2 Changing CDI Course The Selected Course is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after 2 e being adjusted New Course Setting Car A DeL 4 Ila Hazara Figure 2 31 Course Setting 1 Press the CRS key to activate Course mode ditional 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Course values OR z E 3 Press the PFD knob to set a Course that will center the CDI to the VOR station or waypoint if in GPS OBS mode nnun Symbols 2 22 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2 7 3 Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI The Vertical Deviation Glideslope Indicator VDI appears to the left of the VSI whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field A green diamond acts as the VDI Indicator like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal NO GS is annunciated The glideslope on an ILS approach is only shown if the current heading is within 90 of the selected course This prevents the glideslope from being displayed during localizer backcourse approaches S v
120. 2 Turn the PFD knob to move the Altitude Bug to a desired altitude B 3 Press the center of the PFD knob to set the selected altitude to the current oce altitude Bi Selected Altitude a Selected in the BE Altitude Altitude E Bug Alerter E window c 5 Altitude 5 Trend Current Indicator Altitude lt Bx Barometric ee Setting Figure 2 20 Altimeter 2 12 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2 4 2 Altitude Alerting The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts if interfaced to an audio panel when approaching the Selected Altitude Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed the Altitude Alerter is reset j NOTE The Altitude Alerter function may be disabled in some installations When the Altitude Alerter is disabled pressing the ALT key will result in an ALT KEY INOP message The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude shown above the Altimeter changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for five seconds An audio alert may be generated if configured ju e When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for gt five seconds and an aural tone may be generated if configured SEC After reaching the Selected Altitude if the pi
121. 20 PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI REFLECTIVE COATING It is very important to clean the lens using a clean lint free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings CAUTION When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver only one SD card may be present in the GDU 620 and it must be in the lower slot NOTE Do notrely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction TFR information Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control NOTE Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document including screen images of the GDU 620 bezel and displays are subject to change and may not reflect the most current GDU 620 system Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN A NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this
122. 29 5 5 4 GDL 69 69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting 5 30 5 6 Autopilot Operation aarecsecstasteeeneesgecssesemeecparearemuevnre serene terse ne E IPIS 5 31 5 6 1 GAD 43 Attitude essen 5 31 5 6 2 a s m 5 32 5 6 3 Altitude Capture Optional Upgrade 5 32 5 6 4 Autopilot Navigation se er aset dette ht rta er aree tad ualet ibas 5 33 5 6 4 1 Autopilot Operation with GPSS Enabled Autopilots 5 33 5 6 4 2 Autopilot Operation with the GDU 620 Emulating GPSS 5 34 5 6 5 ze umm ero g o TC 5 34 5 6 6 Vertical Speed Control ssssssseeeennnnnnes 5 35 5 6 7 Autopilot Mode Annunciations eeeeeee 5 36 os Synthetic Vision Technology Optional 5V T UM Juss cocucscskocinteut rantes 5 37 S 5 7 1 SVT M Operation 5 39 5 7 2 Activating and Deactivating SVTTM sssssseseess 5 40 5 7 3 I cc 5 4 5 752 Flight Path Marker FPM ussoscesstodivuis ore vtsinFe erts odi ciim f inetsiogs 5 41 SEE EI o dn e Bo RR Rom 5 41 5 7 33 Horizon Heading escetestirestartne Reims edirb Re ROUES 5 42 ONES ME erii erene na e EEE O 5 42 S33 RUNW V DEPICTION ENT cm 5 43 SET ME UU c eee E ee ee eee 5 44 Do q OAC CS eu caseo CHERDU IDEE 5 45 NEGRO MERI orn 5 46 5 7 3 9 Unusual ATUS sce eects sesecasewsstuesazesenchexsstastiietecoecustuckeeess 5 48 6 Annunciations and Alerts
123. 29S Xapul g xipueddy 7 29 9 29 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 System Sec 2 Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B Foreword PFD OD E n amp Alerts Features Symbols Appendix A Index A GARMIN Topo Data The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are displayed Traffic Land Data Terrain and Obstacles will still be displayed even with Topo Data turned off 3 20 Topo Data Off Topo Data On Figure 3 27 Navigation Map Topo Data While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Topo Data option Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off NAVIGATION MAP 1 SI ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT AUTO 200H LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA Figure 3 28 Navigation Map Topo Data Selection Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option pJOM9JO 298 UJa1s g ddd C 298 A S d cw D uT rs x 2 ux D SoJn eo euonippy G 99S y xipuaddy
124. 4 4 10 2 3 Angle of Incidence sssssssennne 4 84 4 10 3 Operating DISTANCE ccsaicescci deeem atur hid aves marta Petre its 4 85 4 10 4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup cece ccccesccsscsessessesesssseeeeeees 4 86 4 10 5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation sesss 4 87 4 10 5 1 Weather display Interpretation sseeeees 4 87 A1052 TRIBIDSISES TOMS gees ib tteptetirtsentet n pes tri bis uota n ito E enD ionian 4 88 0 5 TOLNGUOBS r E E 4 90 AOSA aaa E eee 4 90 4 10 6 Radar Operation in Weather Mode sessss 4 91 4 10 6 1 Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar Page 4 92 4 10 6 2 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell sesessss 4 93 4 10 6 3 Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle eessess 4 94 410 64 Adjusting alli eeescotec eto tse eoe bcm tratto rto pens 4 95 4 10 6 5 Sector Scan GWX Radars Only 4 97 2 10 05 Antenna Stabilizator sesira 4 98 4 10 6 7 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight WATCHTM 4 98 4 10 6 8 Weather Alert GWX Radars Only sssses 4 99 4 10 7 Ground Mapping and Interpretation 4 100 x 4 11 GFDS Weather Optional M beta sraesenteeesenoronrenteciernteent 4 102 2 E 4 11 1 GFDS Registration u 4 103 ALI Register VU INN G DS orrera E O 4 103 4 11 1 2 Deactivate Unit Registration With
125. 67 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu 2 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the desired selection and then press ENT 3 4 1 1 Display Brightness Display brightness mode may be set to manual or automatic The automatic 5 c mode will set the display brightness based on the ambient light The manual mode allows the setting of display brightness between 0 and 10096 a 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the AUX page group Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 The Level will be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to select the Display gt Brightness Level and then press ENT o DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS LEVEL MODE Figure 3 68 Aux Mode Display Brightness Level Selection 3 If the Level was changed Manual will be selected Press the cursor to save the IE settings If you press ENT the Mode setting will be highlighted 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 51 A GARMIN 4 With the Mode value highlighted turn the small MFD knob to select Auto or Manual and then press ENT DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS LEVEL MODE bat Figure 3 69 Aux Mode Display Brightness Mode Selection 3 4 1 2 Airspeed Reference Marks The Best Glide or REF Vr Vx or V1 and Vy or V2 airspeed reference marks for the PFD are adjusted with this function A marker will appear on the _ PFD Airspeed tape at the selected speed when the value is set to On Default 5 reference airspeeds are set duri
126. 9 16 Freezing Level Freezing Level data shows the color coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the Freezing Level is found When no data is displayed lora given altitude the data for that altitude has not been received or is out of date lt and has been removed from the display New data appears at the next update pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar LEGEND ALERTS Figure 4 59 XM Weather Freezing Levels 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 73 Sec4 Sec 5 Sec 6 A GARMIN Freezing Level Viewing Range The Freezing Level Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Freezing Level weather products will be shown on the selected MED Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Freezing Level Data will not be shown In the figure below where 200 NM is De x 5 selected Freezing Level data will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower DATA LINK SETUP T Hag rimnt tian pm un O Qa NEXRAD Dotu Viewing Rungn OFF HEXRAD Legend On Echa Top Dati NT EU 15GNH cma Cloud Ton Onto Vimeing Rony dff as Lishtnina Duto Viewing Ronse JAHH Cell Hoy Onto Viewing Ronan JEG NH SIG AIR Vinwiers Ramm SIGGNH RETAR Dota Viewing Ronoe 158nut S r N O S E T 2 lt L Serfoce Ooto Virwires Ronse GCurfars Data Tine 24 HR u Fra Ly Dota Viewing Range TNH S Minds Alatt Doin Viewing Runen E LIT ENSIT
127. 9 298 A GARMIN Class C TCA Airspace Viewing Range The Class C TCA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class C TCA airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class C TCA airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 200 NM is selected Class C TCA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower Sec 1 Foreword System Sec 2 PFD Avertion BAFETAXI VIEWING RANGE RHWyY EXTENSION RANGE Hi 1NT MOB VIEWING RANGE Toi VOR VIEWING RANGE IU OD a n CLASS B TH ETT CLASS C TCA HANH Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Features Sec 5 Additional Figure 3 57 Navigation Map Class C TCA Viewing Range Selection Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Class C TCA Viewing Range option Sec 7 Symbols 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value zB 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to pe the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 2 g5 3 42 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Class D Airspace Viewing Range The Class D airspace viewing range option selec
128. 90 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 33 plomao4 28S UJa1s g ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUPpIOAV piezeH Y 29 sainjeo4 jeuonippy KleSso o sioquu S SH Y 9 g 28g L S unuuy 9 298 G 29 y xipuaddy Xapul g xipueddy A GARMIN Lightning Viewing Range The Lightning Viewing Range option selects whether the Lightning weather products is shown on the Navigation Map Lightning weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected Lightning weather will not be shown In the figure below where 200 NM is selected z Lightning symbols will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower Foreword NAVIGATION HAP 1 SETUP Sec 2 PFD HEXRAD Data Viewing Ranae HEXRAD Cell Hovemnnt Ronee TOANH OD E A NEXRAD Legend On MA Lightning Viewing Ronen Aas e 2 9 ost Figure 3 48 Lightning Viewing Range Selection Bex 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Weather Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Lightning Viewing Range option zt 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted S 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 2 g5 3 34 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 10 3 Traffic
129. A SD Card Use and Databases The G600 System uses Secure Digital SD cards to load and store various _ types of data For basic flight operations SD cards are required for database storage as well as database updates Database Function Where UES Provider Name Stored Cycle Aviation Airport NAVAID Internal 28 days on fly garmin com Updates installed via Waypoint and GDU 620 Thursdays SD card and copied Airspace information memory into internal memory IGRF model AHRS magnetic Internal 5 years fly garmin com Included with variation model GRS 77 Aviation database memory SafeTaxi Airport surface SD card 56 days on fly garmin com diagrams Thursdays Terrain Topographic map SD card As required fly garmin com 9 arc second version SVT Terrain TAWS required for SVT Airport Topographic map SD card As required fly garmin com Not required with 9 Terrain SVT Terrain TAWS arc second Terrain database Obstacle Obstacle information SD card 56 days on fly garmin com for map SVT and Thursdays TAWS Basemap Boundary and road Internal As required fly garmin com information Memory or SD card Airport Airport facility and SD card 56 days fly garmin com Database may be Directory FBO information available in different versions Update cycle and content may vary FliteCharts FAA published SD card 28 days on fly garmin com Disables 180 days terminal procedures Thursdays after exp
130. A GARMIN 2012 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 6 11 or later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe KS 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A Tel 503 391 3411 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton 040 9RB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 44 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Corporation No 68 Zhangshu 2nd Road Xizhi Dist New Taipei City 221 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 02 2642 9199 Fax 886 02 2642 9099 Garmin Singapore Pte Ltd 46 East Coast Road 3105 06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel 65 63480378 Fax 65 63480278 At Garmin we value your opinion For comments about this guide please e mail Techpubs Salem Garmin com www garmin com Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided th
131. ARMIN TAT Total Air Temperature TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System E TCA Terminal Control Area E TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System d TEMP temperature TERM terminal TFR Temporary Flight Restriction a T HDG True Heading TIS Traffic Information System TMA Terminal Maneuvering Area m Topo topographic bi Track Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position also Ground Track u TRK track 3 TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area UNAVAIL unavailable SZ USR user sas UTC Coordinated Universal Time UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar gt Stereographic Grid EIS V Vspeed velocity airspeed VAR variation ee VFR Visual Flight Rules 2560 VHF Very High Frequency VLOC VOR Localizer Receiver VMC Visual Meteorological Conditions VNAV VNV vertical navigation VOR VHF Omni directional Range VORTAC very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation VS Vertical speed VSI Vertical Speed Indicator WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 WPT waypoint s WX weather 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 8 7 A GARMIN transponder cross track XPDR XTK pJOMa04 UJa1s g ddd QJIN S2UPpIOAV S9Jh e3 s y 9 sioquJ S TESTIS y xipueddy Xopu 28g Z aS c 9S pJezey euonippy unuuv S 9 aS g xipueddy p 28g G aS 9 99S 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 8 8 A GARMIN APPENDIX
132. ARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age WARNING For safety reasons GDU 620 operational procedures must be learned on the ground WARNING To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and 5 understand all aspects of the G600 Pilot s Guide Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use During flight operations carefully compare indications from the GDU 620 to all available navigation sources including the information from other NAVAIDs visual sightings charts etc For safety purposes always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation WARNING Exceeding 200 deg second in pitch or roll may invalidate AHRS attitude provided to the GDU 620 Exceeding 450 KIAS may invalidate ADC information provided to the GDU 620 WARNING Because of anomalies in the earth s magnetic field operating the G600 within the following areas could result
133. AT 1 4 1 5 2 28 OBS 1 15 2 18 2 22 2 27 3 15 3 56 8 5 Obstacle data 3 25 3 26 4 4 4 11 4 25 A 4 Obstacles 3 16 3 20 3 25 4 4 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 44 5 45 7 3 A 4 Obstructions 4 9 4 10 Occluded front 4 71 Operating distance 4 85 Other airspace 3 46 Outside air temperature 1 4 1 5 2 1 2 28 Overspeed 2 6 Overview 1 1 P Page group 1 17 3 2 3 5 Page menus 1 17 1 18 1 19 3 11 3 12 3 30 3 35 3 36 3 51 3 79 4 6 4 15 4 28 4 48 4 50 Panning 3 8 3 89 5 3 5 19 Parallel track 7 6 Parking area 7 2 Part Sun 4 52 PFD 1 3 1 14 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide PFD display units 2 33 PFD options 1 20 1 21 3 50 3 53 3 54 PFD soft keys 2 2 Phone book 3 72 Phone call 3 76 Phone volume 3 75 Photocell 1 23 Pilot Controlled Lighting 3 85 Pitch indication 2 8 2 10 Pitch scale 2 8 5 40 Position reporting 3 3 3 67 Power up 1 4 1 12 1 13 4 12 4 25 4 45 5 11 5 16 5 20 A 2 A 6 Precipitation 4 56 4 59 4 68 4 80 4 81 4 82 4 83 4 91 4 98 4 113 4 122 Precipitation intensity levels 4 88 4 95 Premature descent alerting 4 21 Preset 3 3 5 29 Product age 4 48 4 50 Proximate advisory 7 2 Proximity advisory 4 33 4 35 R Radar 3 1 4 42 4 44 4 54 4 56 4 59 4 80 Radar altimeter 2 12 2 31 3 51 Radar gain 4 95 Rainy 4 52 Range keys 1 17 3 6 3 81 5 3 Range ring 3 4 3 12 3 19 4 5 4 13 4 14 4 33 4 99 RECENT 3
134. AWS B System Test Status Annunciations 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 25 A GARMIN 4 5 External TAWS If a GNS 500WT series or GTN series with TAWS unit is interfaced as GPS 1 text alerts generated by the external TAWS unit will be displayed on the PFD Refer to the GNS 500WT series or GIN series Pilots Guides and or Addendums E for more information regarding these TAWS alerts Text alerts received from the l GNS GIN TAWS unit will be displayed to the left and aligned with the top of the Altitude Tape on the PFD A new annunciation will flash for approximately S a five seconds reword C L F TAWS annunciations can only be received from the 1 GPS unit e f the Garmin GPS TAWS is not available and Terrain SVT is enabled the zu G600 Terrain SVT will generate PFD text alerts and aural callouts An advisory message will indicate when reversion to Terrain SVT alerting has occurred Sec4 5 o g N S a lt Sec 5 Additional Feature Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 4 22 TAWS Annunciations from a GNS GTN TAWS Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 26 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Terrain PFD MFD Visual MFD Pop up Aural Alerting Configurations Annunciations Alert G600 Terrain PFD annunciations are None None Proximity w generated trom the External TAWS External TAWS Unit Unit Installed No MFD Annunc
135. At the same time TAWS self test begins One of the following aural messages is generated lt 5 TAWS System Test OK e TAWS System Failure TAWS information can be displayed on the MFD in the TAWS page of the MAP page group Terrain and obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level AGL are displayed in yellow and red The G600 adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes 4 4 6 Displaying TAWS Data TAWS uses yellow caution and red warning to depict terrain and obstacles alerts relative to aircraft altitude Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude changes The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent terrain obstacles and potential impact points MI a I m S lt Potential Impact Point D t5 So Projected Flight Path ge PPI A 100 ft dd Unlighted Obstacle IUonNal Annun Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Figure 4 10 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity Iu dex VA ML N ADU DE 4 12 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Unlighted Obstacle lt 1000 ft gt 1000 ft lt 1000 ft gt 1000 ft AGL AGL AGL AGL Obstacle Symbol 4 4 6 1 TAWS Page TAWS information is displayed on the last page of the Map page group 38 R Lighted Obstacle Potential Impact Points Table 4 3 TAWS Terrain Obstacle Colors and S
136. Current Altitude Barometric Setting Figure 1 17 Pressing PFD Knob Sets Altitude Select to Current Altitude 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 15 TENG p10M9JO 99S did Z 29S 3IN 295 y 28S e2UPpIOAV piezeH saunjeo4 JEVONIPpY y Xipuaddy Alesso 5 sioqui S sue v 9 aS 2988 unuuy 9 aS G 29g Xapu g xipueddy GARMIN Vertical Speed V S Selects Vertical Speed V S mode Pressing the PFD knob in V S mode will synchronize the bug to the current vertical speed word CD O LL Vertical Speed Bug Current Vertical Speed o Vertical Speed Bug Setting D E z Figure 1 18 Pressing V S Knob Sets Vertical Speed Bug to Current Vertical Speed For aircraft with vertical speed operating limitations red bands showing Vertical Speed Maximum and Minimum ranges will be shown on the lett side of y 2 the Vertical Speed tape When the Vertical Speed Indicator is in one of the red lt ranges the background color of the Vertical Speed Indicator will turn red L o Vertical Soeed Maximum P Vertical Speed Bug 3 2 Vertical Speed Indicator Current Vertical Speed re 3 Vertical Soeed Minimum o lt Vertical Speed Bug Setting z Figure 1 19 Vertical Speed Warning Indication R 1 16 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Barometer BARO Selects Barometric Setting Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Baro mode toggles between standard press
137. D and small MFD knobs to make changes to the name or z number Press ENT to save the changes Press the small MFD knob again to lt cancel the selection cursor 3 4 7 3 Phone Volume Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls you hear Volume controls will only be available when the Idle Connected or _ Changing Volume states are displayed Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Rotary Knobs 1 While viewing the Iridium Phone page press the small MFD knob and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Volume control The volume bar graph will blink when selected 2 Turn the small MFD knob to set the desired volume level 3 Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 75 A GARMIN Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys gt 1 While viewing the Iridium Phone page press the VOL Key at the bottom of the display VOLUHE Se Phone Volume UL MM NE Level Bar Graph Press to Dial RID PHONE eee Pross to Select mist ne oa mem Volume Keys Figure 3 104 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment VE 2 Press the VOL or VOL keys as necessary to adjust the phone volume ALL MIHI Press to Dial Basteln T Press to Show Selected DIAL ATT VOL m BACK Previous List of Press to Press to Press to Attenuate Decrease Increase Phone or Mute Phone Volume Volume Figure 3 105
138. DEC 11 HODE AUTO TIME oe ASL i TTH FC Hii C AIRSPEEDS PFD e LE ar i Vr OFF HFD DISPLAY UNITS OFF DIS SPD NAUTICAL NR KT OFF ALT VS FEET FT FH wa ZA mu Vx Vv oe on O em T i co CU t Er PFD OPTIONS MSYSTEH DISPLAY UNITS WIND VECTOR OFF H V ANGLE MAGNE TIC HAV STATUS STYLE 1 PRESS INCHES IN TEHP CELSIUSCD SYNCHRONIZATION CDI ON BARO ON SYSTEM SETUP HAP WX ALK FPL D8000 00 IDFLT UNIT RA TEST DFLT SPD ADVISORY Figure 1 22 System Setup Page 1 20 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN System Settings Values 1 From the first AUX page press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF 3 Press ENTER to save the setting More detail on changing settings is in the Section 3 MFD Aux pages System Settings section Category Settings Affected Quantities Exceptions Display Level Brightness levels on the PFD n Brightness Mode and MFD SR Airspeeds Glide or REF Reference markers on PFD airspeed tape or V1 on V2 Synchronization EN On Off Crossfill Nav information to _ BARO On Off GDU 620 g 3 d PFD Options Wind Vector Off Style 1 Style 4 PFD wind vector display format Nav Status NAV Status Style 1 2 Location of GPS navigation option not data available in all installations Date Tim
139. ERRAIN SVT only TRAFFIC FAIL Traffic device has e Contact your Garmin dealer for failed service Traffic data will no longer be displayed TRAFFIC STBY Traffic is in Standby e Check traffic system controls on Mode while airborne the MFD traffic map page or traffic system TRK LOST Heading and track E from active GPS lost SS HSI is using secondary E GPS track TRK TRAFFIC Heading Lost Traffic is now based on track WX ALERT e Possible severe e Check weather radar zA weather ahead i WX RADAR e Communication with e Contact your Garmin dealer for l Weather Radar lost service 25 WX RDR e Weather radar needs e Contact your Garmin dealer for SERVICE service service WXR INPUT e Weather radar is e Contact your Garmin dealer for FAULT not receiving one or service more inputs Table 6 1 Alert Messages 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 6 9 A GARMIN 6 2 System Status The System Status page of Aux mode shows the status serial number and software version of LRUs and the date of databases There are no menu pages In the LRU Status column a green check means the unit is present and operat ing properly while a red X indicates an absence or failure LRU Info Window md Failed LRU Goc GOL 69 Passed LRU GDU 1 BDU 2 GAL GAS STATUS SERIAL HUMBER VERSION DAT Ass AVIATION REGION Database Window AVIATION CYCLE AMIATIDM EFFECTIVE ANTATION EXPIRES
140. ERSION OBSTAGLE CYCLE CSSTAGLE EFFECTIVE CS TALE EXPIRES LRU or DBASE Selection Figure 5 26 LRU Status Window 5 30 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 6 Autopilot Operation The G600 is able to interface to certain autopilot systems to provide the functions described in this section Please refer to your particular Airplane Flight 3 Manual and autopilot documentation for specific information and operating instructions 5 6 1 GAD 43 Attitude The GAD 43 Adapter may Optionally provide attitude information from the Garmin GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System to certain autopilots The GAD 43 has the ability to disconnect the autopilot if an error in the GAD 43 output or GRS 77 is detected This disconnect mechanism must be tested prior to each flight in the following manner UJa1s g 29 ddd C 298 o 1 Allow all avionics to complete power up and begin normal operation 7 2 Engage the autopilot while on the ground 3 Press the AP TEST soft key and verify that the autopilot disconnects normally 3 d 4 CAUTION Do not use the autopilot if the AP TEST does not disengage the autopilot normally mu 0 te e 1 ua Jeuonippy G 29g Autopilot Disconnect When the GDU 620 attitude monitors have detected an AHRS malfunction or the inability to actively monitor the AHRS a Check Attitude annunciation will be displayed on the PFD and the autopilot will automati
141. FD on the page being viewed C 298 N 298 gt z T E e rar sounjes G 29 euonippv SHo V 8 UNUUVY 9 285 TAWS Alert Pop Up WT TERRAIN 3 IBF 1000r 1 Key presses to continue tbe NAVIGATION HAP CL ADVISORY aad Figure 4 16 TAWS Alert Pop Up 7 To acknowledge the pop up alert 8 Press the CLR key returns to the currently viewed page OR Press the ENT key accesses the TAWS Page a 8 If the pilot takes no action the pop up will be removed when the alert is no longer active 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 17 A GARMIN TERRAIN z 100r1 1000F Sec 4 PULL UP 5 te No Lm lt Figure 4 17 TAWS Alert Annunciations Pull Up 4 4 7 1 TAWS B Alerting Colors and Symbology Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts The three TAWS alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology are shown in the following table Alert Level Annunciator Text Potential Impact Example Visual Annunciation Point Symbol Warning White text on red background X mmm Black text on white Not Applicable TAWS INH background Table 4 4 TAWS Alert Colors and Symbology 4 18 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN PFD MFD Alert Alert Type Annunciation Aural Message Excessive Descent Rate Pull Up l Warning EDR W FLTA Terrain Warning Terr
142. GFDS PRECIP Legend Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Tum the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Legend 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 114 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 8 GFDS Infrared Satellite IR SAT Data Viewing Range S IR SAT data is available over North America and Europe and depicts cloud z top temperatures from satellite imagery Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes Information is updated every half hour 3 C OO 05 FEATHER he NECS Figure 4 109 GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend unuu Y 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 115 A GARMIN IR SAT Data Viewing Range The IR SAT Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value IR SAT weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected IR SAT _ Will not be shown In the figure below where 200 NM is selected IR SAT
143. Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide XVI A GARMIN 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 System Description This section provides an overview of the G600 Avionics Display System The G600 system is an integrated display system that presents primary flight instrumentation navigation and a moving map to the pilot through large format displays TENG p10M9JO 29 In normal operating mode the Primary Flight Display PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation attitude heading airspeed altitude vertical speed replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster The Multi Function Display MFD normally displays a full color moving map with navigation ddd C 29 information as well as supplemental data GMU 44 Magnetometer Garmin Navigator s GTP 59 Temperature Probe M GDU 620 GRS 77 AHRS GAD 43 43e a AS DRRLUSAALLA Autopilot Weather Radar uds Flight Director Datalink Traffic Altimeter Navigati Weath gation eather DME G El ee a E e uL Figure 1 1 G600 System LRU Configuration The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units LRUS GDU 620 Primary Fight Display PFD and Multi Function Display MFD GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer ADC GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide y Xipuaddy Alesso 5 sioqui S su Jy saunjeo4 SDULPIOAY CHIN 9 aS 98g unuuv Jeuonippy piezeH c 29g Xapul g xipueddy y 295 G
144. IOAV 1 14 Ulals G DIOM9IO I d dis VIVI WAC pe iS wa v NIST DJeZe 29S IIS 1 Airways e RiveriLake Names land CounyTet e ety Se Mediumciy Smldy SmlTwn e Freeways t Highways e Roads e Raloads e Political Boundaries daMonGis e e NEN NN e t Intersections 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 A GARMIN 3 3 6 Panning The Panning Map Page function allows you to move the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale and to examine information at the pointer location When you select the panning function by pressing the small MFD knob a target pointer flashes on the map display A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer the ETE from your present position to the pointer elevation at the pointer and bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position ETE from present position to tip of pointer System Foreword Sec 1 Sec 2 PFD Information IS related Elevation at Pointer Lat Lon at Pointer to the tip of the pointer O o qp WOO eis VT 2 lt ELEV fETh Sec 5 Additional HAX BIN ror Features 2g 121 Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts a Map Pointer Present Position Sec 7 Symbols Figure 3 8 Navigation Map Pointer Location Information 1 While viewing a Map or Chart page press the small MFD knob A f
145. Ja1s g 29 di 298 BDULDIOAY pJezeH Y 29S This page intentionally left blank SoJhn1eaJ euonppy G 29S sue v 8 unuuv 9 29 sjoquu S LS lesso D 8 29 y xipuaddy Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 34 A GARMIN 3 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY MFD The MFD displays a color moving map with navigation information Moving map information is shown on the two Navigation Map pages and the optional lt Weather WX pages requires a datalink and subscription or the GWX 68 7 Weather Radar The Navigation Map displays aviation data e g airports VORs airways airspaces geographic data e g cities lake highways borders topographic data map shading indicating elevation and hazard data e g traffic terrain weather The map options set for Navigation Map page are used as the default settings for the optional Weather WX pages 3 The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR soft key The Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways North Up NORTH UP Track Up TRACK UP Desired Track Up DTK UP or Heading Up HDG UP UJa1s g 29 r7 Bl Wind Vector Map Orientation gt _ TE Map Scale gor Range Select zc Page Group Position l Menu Page Group Clear Sy Page Label E Enter or SD Card Slots Small MFD Knob Select Page 2 7 Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Large MFD Knob 27 Select Page Group Figure 3
146. LPIOAY pJezey Y 29 E EO mM Og omes QE v0 07 Table 4 21 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing E LW ry C 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 Sec4 TO N 1 au a br S s A GARMIN NOTE Product age for individual reports of XM AIRMETs SIGMETs City Forecasts County Warnings Cell Movement and TFRs are not provided by XM Weather Service Product age indication for XM Icing Potential and Turbulence is not included on the weather map The valid time for these products is displayed on the weather map in place of the generation time The valid time indication for XM Freezing Level Winds Aloft and Canada Winds Aloft is not displayed Instead the generation time for these is displayed Symbol Description go o Bow Bo Bo Lu Hae BL EN High Low Temp Table 4 22 Weather Symbols 4 5 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN 4 9 4 Weather Legends The LEGEND soit key displays a pop up legend of the currently used weather products Pressing the LEGEND soit key again the MFD knob the ENT or CLR keys will remove the legend 1 A full page legend can be selected by selecting the Weather Legend option in the XM Weather Map Menu or pressing the LEGEND soft key on the Weather Map Page The legend displayed will match the selected weather products Turn the large or small MFD knobs to scroll through the legend if necessary
147. MD 3 JN 29S Radar Altimeter Value Figure 2 44 Radar Altimeter Display 150 foot RA Altitude e2UPepIOAV piezeH y 29 When the radar altitude is 0 the brown band will be level with the altitude tape pointer As the radar altitude increases above 0 the brown band will move down the tape in an amount equal to the current radar altitude SoJn eo euonippy G 298 S y 8 unuuy 9 22S Barometric Altitude 0 Foot Difference On Ground sioquJ S 29 leSSO D 8 29 Brown Band Indicating The Ground Radar Altimeter Value Figure 2 45 Radar Altimeter Display 0 foot RA Altitude y xipueddy The Radar Altimeter self test process will be annunciated on the PFD above the Radar Altimeter altitude value The self test is a wiring test to indicate communication between the GDU and the Radar Altimeter The self test will be cancelled after 15 seconds the Test key is pressed again or you leave the System Setup page X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 31 A GARMIN A NOTE Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function 1 Turn the large MFD knob to Aux mode and then turn the small MFD knob to the System Setup page Press the RA TEST soft key RA TEST will be annunciated above the Radar Altimeter value The Radar Altimeter value will show a certain number to indicate that communication is taking place between the Radar Altimeter and the GDU See your Radar Alti
148. Magnetometer 1 1 6 GTX 330 330D Optional E Figure 1 7 GTX 330 330D Mode S Transponder The GTX 330 330D is a solid state transponder that provides Modes A C and S functions The transponder provides traffic information to the display through an ARINC 429 digital interface A NOTE GTX 33 33D can also be used to display traffic information on the GDU 620 1 1 7 GTP 59 The GTP 59 temperature probe provides Outside Air Temperature OAT data to the GDC 74A 74B Figure 1 8 GTP 59 Temperature Probe 1 1 8 GSR 56 The GSR 56 isan IridiumQ satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone calls aircraft position reporting and world wide weather products 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 5 TENG p10M9JO 29 ddd Z 295 S9Jn eo 92UPepIOAV QJIN EPUORIppy E Jc S9 v 79 sioquJ S 29S y xipuaddy AJeSSO S 8 299 X9pU g xipueddy LI I pleze unuuv 9 235 y 28S G 29 Sec 1 System Foreword Sec 5 Sec 4 Additional Sec 6 A GARMIN 1 1 9 GDL 69 69A Optional The GDL 69 69A is a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver that receives broadcast weather data The GDL 69A is the same as the GDL 69 with the addition of an Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment receiver Weather data and control of audio channel and volume is displayed on the MFD via a High Speed Data Bus HSDB Ethernet connection The GDL 694 is also interfaced to an audio pan
149. Map Window 259 Map Scale S Bearing amp Distance to Wpt from apn H Present Position Lat Lon Qd MAYEOCIMT EMEDRHEATICON RwylFreq Soft Key RWW FREU API DIE gt Airport Directory Soft Key Wot Weather Info Soft Key gt Figure 3 114 Flight Plan Waypoint Information Page a CU NOTE Waypoint information is shown on the second page of the Flight a Plan page group x 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 81 3ec P SEC Z PFD Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A GARMIN 3 5 2 1 Selecting a Waypoint ord ewo 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to select the identifier for the waypoint stem C 2 y CD U O O AV Features WAYPOINT INFORMATION RA FREG APT DIR EX Ar ISOR Figure 3 115 Waypoint Selection 2 Press the ENT key to select the waypoint OR 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the small MFD knob 2 Tum the small MFD knob counterclockwise S Goral SYMDO ssary J Gloss E Figure 3 116 Waypoint Category Selection 3 Turm the small MFD knob to show FPL NRST or RECENT 4 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport and then press ENT 3 82 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 5 2 2 Waypoint Information Detail
150. Not all installations will have both NAV1 and NAV2 soft keys DME Information DME Hold Annunciation Selected DME Set Hold for Selected DME Figure 2 5 DME Soft Keys DME HOLD DME HOLD activates deactivates the DME tuning hold function DME HOLD may be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2 The Hold function is automatically canceled when switching between NAV1 and NAV2 tuning sources Not all installations will have the DME HOLD soft key SYN VIS The SYN VIS sott key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated soft keys SYN TERR Ihe SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology M is installed and enables synthetic terrain depiction HRZN HDG The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed Pressing this key enables horizon heading marks and digits APTSIGNS Ihe APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology M is installed and enables airport sign posts Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN BACK The BACK soft key returns to the previous soft key menu d 2 2 Airspeed Indicator The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 units while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of five units Speed indicat
151. RAD radar images Avoidance Ground clutter T y Strobes and spurious radar data e Sun strobes when the radar antenna points directly at the sun Interference from buildings or mountains which may cause shadows Metallic dust from military aircraft which can cause alterations in radar scans Annun J IU dey uc JUI 4 56 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 9 06 Weather Page Map Orientation The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages DJOM9JOJ 1 While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1 2 or 3 of the Wx page group press the MENU key With Weather Setup highlighted press ENT 2 With the Map Orientation option active turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value UJ91s g 29S ddd C 298 Mop rientntion HEXRAD Dota Viewing Ronse NEXRAD Legend HIA 298 Figure 4 37 Weather Page Map Orientation 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option pJezey y 29 gt lt e Qo T E e a gt 4 9 7 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range DE The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Lin
152. S GIU s eio o RR MN M ME cies 5 se 5 1 5 1 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 5 8 2 5 9 5 1 5 2 Viewing Chart NOTAMIS casse cese teer repairs Residuos 5 9 NEN E Mr D m ChartView Optional 5 10 d 5 2 1 Cycle Number and Revision 5 11 522 Viewing Chart Details in ChartView sesss c FliteCharts esccecseesssessssesssesssesssessssesssesssessseessessseesssessseesneesseesneeasees 5 16 amp 5 3 1 Cycle Number and Revision eeeeeees 5 16 SI M 5 18 5 4 1 INO DD 5 19 c PM MEE Uum 5 19 5 4 1 2 HotSpot TIDIOHHSHODtentetettummaiten nemen dads mre esit dunidn te a 5 4 2 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision 5 20 33 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment seeeseesss 5 22 5 5 5 1 Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services 5 22 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide xiii A GARMIN 5 5 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information 5 24 m 5 5 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment Radio 5 25 5 534 CIAO WC Ie RR 5 26 5 5 3 2 Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel 5 27 5 5 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume sees 5 28 5 5 3 4 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets 5
153. S commands as well as to older autopilots that do gt _ not have built in support for GPSS SER Wot 2 Flight Plan Leg 2 Flight Plan Leg 1 HIDE Tl t te e a gt 72 Jeuonippy G 99S Turn Anticipation Wot 3 Curve Aircraft Present Wot 1 Position Figure 5 30 GPSS Turn Anticipation 5 6 4 1 Autopilot Operation with GPSS Enabled Autopilots Some autopilots have built in support for GPS Steering GPSS commands v from a GPS navigator The GDU 620 will send the GPSS commands from the displayed GPS source to the autopilot For example if GPS 1 is displayed on the HSI the GPSS commands from GPS 1 will be sent to the autopilot Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilots GPSS function NOTE GPSS commands are not sent to the autopilot when a VLOC source is displayed on the HSI 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 33 A GARMIN 5 6 4 2 Autopilot Operation with the GDU 620 Emulating GPSS Inorder to provide GPSS functionality for autopilots that do not have built in GPSS support the GDU 620 can convert the GPSS commands into a heading B sional When GPSS mode is turned on the autopilot heading mode will follow the GPSS commands instead of the heading bug Reter to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot heading mode
154. SETUP Hop Orlentetion ET CLER Erha Tap Data Viewina Ronen Cloud Top Data Vinwing Ronga Sec 4 g TE NS lt Sec 5 Additional Features Figure 4 39 NEXRAD Legend Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor tlashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts UO RY x S Sec 7 Symbols D Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 4 58 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 9 9 Echo Tops NOTE Due to similarities in color schemes the display of Echo Tops is mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD Echo Tops data shows the location elevation and direction of the radar echo The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is Mu Information is derived from NEXRAD data Figure 4 40 XM Weather Echo Tops gt z T E e rar pJezey The display of radar coverage is always active when either NE
155. SS Ground Speed Ground Track GRS GS GTX HDG Heading HFOM Hg hPa HPL 190 00601 02 Rev F degrees Fahrenheit Federal Aviation Administration Federal Communication Commission forecast flight director Flight Information Services Broadcast Flight Information Service Data Link Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance flight plan frequency freezing Flight Service Station foot feet glideslope Garmin Air Data Computer Garmin Satellite Data Link Garmin Display Unit geographic Global Navigation Satellite Landing System Garmin Audio Panel System Greenwich Mean Time Garmin Magnetometer Unit Global Positioning System GPS Roll Steering The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position see Track Garmin Reference System Ground Speed Garmin Transponder heading TIT sioqui g 8 995 39S The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon E indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set x directional gyro Horizontal Figure of Merit mercury hectopascal Horizontal Protection Level Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 8 3 o IMC HSDB HSI Hz IAF ICAO Z IFR IGRF ILS IOI INFO in HG INT INTEG CD z Appendix B Sec 8 Sec 7 Index Appendix A Glossary Symbols AE LIFR By LAT 8g g LCD TT fp D LCL LED Leg LNAV LOC LOI LON LPV LRU LT LTNG MAG MAG VAR MapMX MAX MAXSPD 8 4 A GARMIN High Speed Data Bus Horizontal Situati
156. Satellite Weather Map 4 48 4 9 3 XM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age 4 50 8 4 9 4 Weather Legends s 4 53 4 9 5 op P 4 54 4 9 5 1 Reflectivity sss 4 55 3 495 2 NEXRAD U tHOlIS aoc iccisees entere repete nnb teas 4 56 4 9 6 Weather Page Map Orientation seeeeeee 4 57 4 9 7 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range eeeeneeee 4 5 _ 3 4 9 8 NEXRAD Legend 4 58 9 a 4 9 9 ECO MOS T H 4 59 BAC Coud TOD e R E a 4 61 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide Xi A GARMIN 49 11 XM WX Satellite Lightning eeeeennnns 4 63 A9 12 AC OV CNIS IM uet oU Pu UM IE DE MEUS 4 64 4 9 13 SIGMETs and AIRMETS c ceccsscssssesssesesssssssseeseeserseeeaes 4 66 EE NB oo E 4 68 4 9 15 Surface Analysis and City Forecast 4 70 WORIOMEE CHER DET 4 73 MON c2 e Em 4 75 4918 County VV AIA OS sacs TET 4 78 TEM lO Weather Rada iirinn 4 80 ae 4 10 1 Garmin GWX 68 Radar Description 4 80 4 10 1 1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar 4 80 4 10 1 2 Antenna Beam lllumination eeeeeeeee 4 81 4 10 1 3 Radar Signal Attenuation secciones cott Enero eere 4 82 4 10 2 Radar Signal Reflectivity sssseennnees 4 83 NIS NM cedri o 4 83 410 22 Ground DSBUUET SL e aeraseenorqeutt eratum urde Uta emus dite ania ge uetus 4 8
157. Scale 4 100 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 Press the MODE soft key 2 Press the GROUND soft key to place the radar in Ground Map mode A pop up lt regarding caution in operating radar on the ground will appear Turn the large lt MED knob to highlight YES and then press ENT CAUTION Activating rodar on ground Reod ond follow oll safety precautions Continue activating radar Figure 4 90 Ground Radar Operation Caution 3 Press the BACK soft key 4 Press the MFD knob to activate the cursor 5 Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the TILT field x 6 Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small MFD knob to display ground R returns at the desired distance 7 Press the MFD knob to remove the cursor 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 101 Sec4 Hazard Avoidance 4 11 GFDS Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium satellite A GARMIN GFDS Weather Optional system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56 The primary maps for viewing Garmin Flight Data System GFDS Weather data are the Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group These are the only GDU 620 e map displays capable of all available GFDS weather products The Wx Weather y amp pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up Both GFDS and XM Weather may be installed and selected individually GFDS Weather coverage is available thro
158. T products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected SIGMET AIRMET will not be shown In the figure below where 300 NM is selected SIGMET AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and 3 BO lower SIB amp IR Viewing Runas 7 22 gt z fo T E e rar pJezey injee ODW Figure 4 115 GFDS SIG AIR Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the 4 MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT ER 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight SIG AIR Viewing Range a 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 9 8 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option z 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 121 A GARMIN 4 11 11 METARs 5 A NOTE Atmospheric pressure reported for METARSs is given in hectopascals hPa except in the United States where it is reported in inches of mercury in Hg Temperatures are reported in Celsius A NOTE METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation b database service area 7 METAR METeorological Aerodrome Report known as an Aviation Routine z Weather Report is t
159. TATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU Vi Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Contents 1 System Overview eese nnn nennen nnn MEE ccuP qued 1 1 1 Line Replaceable Units LRU seseeeeee ie 1 1 2 CUR m 1 1 3 CEE e scciccosasetaensaacsatesscetatoraetneesacetespeadctaeesaeteemsacotan 1 1 4 cp eee 1 1 5 cur E EE E E A LiG GTX 330 330D HOOT OMG sert ised oet os testn itas petis beue Un piros 1 1 7 EE EE I AE A A EA A A 1 1 8 CoA 1 1 9 GDL 69 69A ODIO dietesent icei scutis bestn itas pets begun bns dextacieses We GAD AS Se ONG Oia Ec 1 1 11 GWX 68 Weather Radar sese seritur sei Edere Eres ke bete iens 1 1 12 Garmin Navigator Interface 1 1 13 Attitude Heading Reference System AHRS ltd Secure Digital CAO a cccens cave inona nErenn EER PES cud dio nioena EEE EEA EET EE ERE 1 3 International Geomagnetic Reference Field E NE S cuESU Cio TEM 1 4 1 POL OO Gienia a iie acne IDE E IN PIB NO sisirin ifn n Eo ERa E PDE OVS e E USES MFPDKIOD rc UC FB DUI RC m E 1 4 2 Using the Soft Key Got LN 1 4 3 Using ihe Page MONS isccssznsscsessteetsestucasrastentsaunsuesecusteubimans 1 4 4 SVS TSIM 5 uo cT 1 4 5 Display Back b If asssaaetp usta iess ehe eret er tendunt 2 Primary Flight Display PFD
160. TAWS Not Available Alert TAWS requires a 3 D GPS position solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums Should the position solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area the annunciation TAWS N A is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS page The aural message TAWS Not Available is generated When the GPS signal is re established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area the aural message TAWS Available is generated 4 4 7 9 TAWS Failure Alert TAWS continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status If the terrain obstacle database is not available the aural message TAWS System Failure is generated along with a TAWS FAIL annunciation 4 4 8 TAWS System Status During power up TAWS conducts a self test of its aural and visual annunciations The system test can also be manually initiated An aural alert is 4 issued at test completion TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed g 5 exceeds 30 knots pJezey Y 29 gt z 2 T EI e a gt PFD MFD Alert Annunciation TAWS Available TAWS Available TAWS System Test in Progress None Alert Type Aural Message TAWS System Test Pass TAWS System Test OK TAWS N A A TAMS Not Available TAWS Alerting is Disabled None TAWS System Test Fail TANS FATE TAWS System Failure Table 4 7 T
161. TEMESTTRIESS LL County Gate Vinving Fam Cyclone Dota Virwing Ronen c 2 3 oY ea L o5 Figure 4 60 Freezing Level Viewing Range Selection Sec 7 Symbols 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Sec 8 Glossary U N S Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Frz Lvl Viewing Range value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Appendix A e Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appendix B Index 4 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 9 17 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface lt and at selected altitudes Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL Pressing the WIND DOWN or WIND UP soft keys steps down or up in 3 000 foot increments pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar Wi Difi LOM Ho 4 i a LEGEND BOND COMA WENO LP ARTS Figure 4 61 XM Weather Winds Aloft HINDS ALOFT KNOTS gt KMOTS OR LESS 10 KNOTS OF LESS sU KNUTS OF LESS Figure 4 62 XM Weather Winds Aloft Legend 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G60
162. Using Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment Ceo 3 Pressing the ATT soft key will attenuate the volume Press the ATT soft key again to return to the previous volume 5 5 34 4 Making a Phone Call 1 While viewing the Iridium Phone page enter a phone number or select one from the Phone Book catalog a 2 Press the DIAL key 3 After completing the call press the HANG UP key 3 76 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 7 5 Answering a Phone Call An incoming phone call will generate a pop up announcing the call When a call is accepted the pop up will show that the call is connected and the cumulative call time will be shown 1 When an incoming call is available press the ENT key or the ANSWER soft key to answer the call Or press the CLR key or the HANG UP soft key to not answer the call and hang up plOMal ddd C 298 INCOMING CALL adi 99 Press ENT to answer Press CLR to hangup e2UPpIOAV piezeH Y 29S NAVIGATION MAP 1 ANSWER HANG UP Figure 3 106 Incoming Call Pop Up G 298 SoJn eo euonippy 2 After a called is accepted and connected the connection time will be shown on the pop up Press the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume pressing it again will return to normal volume Press the HANG UP soft key to end the call Press the VOL or VOL keys to adjust the call volume S y 79 unuuv 9 298 sioquJ S LS
163. VECTOR LENGTH x ERAT NAY RANGE RING C TOPO DATA ge T PD SCALE JE TERRAIN DATA OBSTACLE VIEWING RANGE Figure 3 22 Navigation Map Track Vector Length Selection 3 Press ENT to accept the highlighted value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 17 o plomal 29S Wass ddd C 298 ai 29S eDUEpIOAV piezeH y 29 sainyee4 PUO pp sjoquJ S sual 9 988 unuuy 9 29S G 29 leSsO D 8 29S y xipueddy A GARMIN Wind Vector The Wind Vector option when turned on will show a box in the top right corner of the MFD indicating the wind direction and speed Wind Direction od 5KT Wind Speed BERBVERIIU Figure 3 23 Navigation Map Wind Vector Display Foreword Sec 1 System o 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the 7 MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Wind Vector option Turn the small MFD knob to select the On or Off E DIK up 208m b 2 lt eo q N O Qn cm 2 S lt L Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press
164. Weather Group Traffic Group Aviation Group Caa optional Orientation Direction NEXRAD Off Range Traffic Off Modes SafeTaxi Off Range Viewing Viewing 9 Range Range North Up Off Range NEXRAD Off Range Rwy Off Range A Cell Mov Extension C A Range Auto Zoom On Off NEXRAD On Off INT NDB Off Range Legend Viewing Range Land Data On Off XM Ltng Off Range VOR Off Range Viewing Range amp Track Vector Off Time Class B Off Range y SS Length TMA i Wind On Off Class C Off Range Vector TCA pu Topo Data Data Omo Restricted Off Range x Topo Scale On Off MOA Off Range og Military Terrain On Off Other Off Range Data ADIZ 6 Terrain On Off hl v p E Scale Obstacle Off Range il nd Viewing Range Lat Lon Off Range Viewing Range Field of On Off View shown if the Aviation database is current shown if Synthetic Vision is available Table 3 2 Navigation Map Page Menu Selections 3 12 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 10 1 Map Feature Options Choose the options to determine the values for display on each Navigation Map The options you save will be retained until changed The options may be selecting by using the following procedure 1 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT Figure 3 15 Navigation Ma
165. XRAD or y ECHO TOPS is selected Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops gt information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in grayish purple Radar capability exists in these areas but it is not active or is off line 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 59 e 7 22 A GARMIN Echo Top Data Viewing Range The Echo Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Echo Top weather products will be shown on the selected MED Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Echo _ Tops will not be shown In the figure below where 200 NM is selected Echo Top x data will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower DATALINK SETUP Han Orinntotion Trock un NEXRAD Deta Vinwing Ronee TEC NM HEXRAD Lesund On Echo Ton Dota Viewing Ranan Cloud Top Data Vimeing Ramm Lightning Geto Winwing Ringa Call Hiv Date Vinwing Ronga SIG RIR Viewine Range METAR Deta Vimwina Aimat Surfocre Dota Viewing Ronen Surfurm Data Timm Fre Lal Dota Viewing Ronan Figure 4 41 Echo Top Viewing Range Selection Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD Sec4 S ta N UO a 4 lt L Sec 5 Additional Features While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Sec 6 Annun amp
166. affic information is reduced as the age Increases Y 92S gt lt O e T E e a gt pJezey The displayed data is not current 6 to 12 seconds since last message The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting 12 to 60 seconds since last message Traffic may exist within the selected display range but it is not displayed Traffic data has failed Traffic has not been detected The traffic service is unavailable or out of range Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page Shown in center of Traffic Map Page Table 4 19 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 4 A GARMIN 49 XM WX Satellite Weather Optional 5 The primary map for viewing XM WX Satellite Weather data are the Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group These are the only GDU 620 map displays capable of all available XM WX Satellite weather products The XM WW Satellite Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up 49 1 Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products _ _ When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page the age of the data is displayed on the screen The age of the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time Weather products are refreshed at zE specific inte
167. ain Ahead Pull Up Terrain Ahead RTC W ITI W Pull Up or Terrain Terrain Pull Up Pull Up FLTA Obstacle Warning Obstacle Ahead Pull Up Obstacle Ahead ROC W IOI W Pull Up or Obstacle Obstacle Pull Up Pull Up Terrain Ahead Terrain Ahead or Caution Terrain Caution Terrain Obstacle Ahead Obstacle Ahead or Caution Obstacle Caution Obstacle FLTA Terrain Caution RTC C ITI C FLTA Obstacle Caution ROC C IOI C Premature Descent Alert Caution PDA Voice Callout None Five Hundred VCO 500 Excessive Descent Rate Caution EDR C Negative Climb Rate Caution NCR C Don t Sink or Too Low Terrain Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation dependent Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks Table 4 5 TAWS B Alerts Summary 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 19 aULPIOAY pJezey Y 29 Too Low Terrain 3g Sink Rate A GARMIN 4 4 7 2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Ihe purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate EDR alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an excessive rate The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO C151b are shown below Foreword 6000 Sec 1 System 5500 5000 Sec 2 PFD 4500 4000 3500 Sec 3 MFD 3000 2500 2000
168. all MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option DJOM 310 Terrain Data The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the Navigation Map The Terrain Data Icon 2M will be shown when Terrain has been selected Wass 39S Terrain Data On ddd C 298 Terrain Data e Og wv D Q N d E AM 5S 2B mum D Terrain Elevation Scale Terrain Data Icon sainjee4 jeuonippy G 29 NAVIGATION MAP 1 S sue v 9 unuuv 9 28 ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT AUTO ZOOM LAND DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR NAV RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE OBSTACLE VIEWING RANGE Li EX IEEE IS eee eee Se Eee Figure 3 32 Navigation Map Terrain Data Selection y xipueddy Alesso 5 S OQUUAS g 9S 288 Xepul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 23 A GARMIN 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Terrain Data option Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Foreword N System Sw Sec 1 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD kn
169. ally hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective weather A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position E E Cursor Location MTN Obscures Visibility 35 KS SIGET Product Age IFR Line Cursor On AIRMET SIGMET Line HE THISE Ja TE Localized SIGMET i 3 Icing 38 SIGMET Line UNUU i T M krl Et CFDS WEATHER Hae 1 EGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 113 GFDS Weather Page AIRMETs SIGMETs When enabled SIGMET AIRMETS advise the pilot of potentially hazardous weather to all aircraft SIGMET AIRMET data covers icing turbulence dust _ and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service The update rate is 7 every 12 minutes in the U S Elsewhere updates are made as they are issued 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 119 A GARMIN THF ORRAT ION SIGHET AIRHET Press le ENT ke la relon lo Ur boe p Sec 4 S TE N lt Figure 4 114 GFDS Weather AIRMETs SIGMETs Detail and Legend When enabled the following AIRMETs are available for display e Icing e Turbulence e FR conditions e Mountain obscuration e Surface winds 4 120 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range The SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value SIGMET AIRME
170. alue 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 gt z T e rar pJezey 7 22 A GARMIN Foreword W w N system c ec 2 PFD TERRAIN PROXIMITY ahi a m E lt Dat NORTH UF ac Features Sec 5 Additional Fea Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts SE t 5 j TERPATMH lt 100r i E co Figure 4 9 Navigation Map Page with Terrain Data Displayed a 4 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 3 2 Terrain Proximity Limitations Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displayed terrain is advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this x information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles s Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid _ to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain Terrain uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive aN WARNING The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cro
171. ancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 9 12 Cell Movement Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by a ground based system Cells are represented by yellow squares with direction of movement indicated with short orange arrows a b S s LEGEND ra Figure 4 46 XM Weather Cell Movement On most applicable maps Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD On the Weather Data Link Page Cell Movement data can be selected independently 4 64 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Cell Movement Data Viewing Range The Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range and below where Cell Movement weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Cell Movement will not be shown In the figure below where 300 NM is selected Cell Movement data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and lower UJ91s g 298 DATA LINK SETUP Han Orientation Trock up NEXRAD Dea Vining Range oF HEXRAD Legend On Echo Ton Daba Viewing Renan Be Cloud Tor Date Viewing Ronse IF Linhtniem Deta Vimiin Anae JOH Cell Hoy Date Vieving Range SIGALA Viewing Fone METAR Detm Vining Ronen Curfuce Duta Viewing Ronan ddd C 298 HIA 298 piezep y 29 gt lt o e T E e
172. ances on the Weather Radar page are always shown in NM 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MODE soft key 52 While on the ground press the STANDBY soft key A warm up period is initiated countdown is displayed on the screen GWX radars only After the warm up is complete the radar enters the Standby Mode 3 When the aircraft is airborne press the WEATHER soft key OR 2 4 While on the ground select the WEATHER soft key A confirmation window is displayed CAUTION Activating rodar on ground Reod ond follow oll sofety precoutions Continue activating radar Sec4 5 o g N S lt Figure 4 77 Caution for Radar Activation Confirmation 5 Turn the large MFD Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT key to continue radar activation OR 6 If the aircraft is airborne select the WEATHER soft key A warm up period is initiated countdown is displayed on the screen GWX radars only After the warm up is complete the radar begins transmitting _ Press the RNG keys to select the desired range 4 0 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN mti S r 10 Hn TILT BEARING GAIN WEATHER RADAR LUC NU 1 ea VERTICAL Figure 4 78 Vertical Scan Display 4 10 6 2 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell Not available with all radars When vertically scanning with stabilization ON the actual physical area that the radar is sweeping may not mat
173. arge MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 39 pJOM910J 29S Wass ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUepIOAV piezeH y 29 SoJn ea jeuonippy JeSSO E sioqu S SHalV 9 Q 29S LS unuuy 9 288 G 299 y xipueddy Xepul g xipueddy A GARMIN VOR Viewing Range The VOR viewing range option selects whether VOR information is shown on the Navigation Map VOR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 150 NM is selected VOR information will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower Foreword Sec 1 System into Sec 2 PFD SEEE VIE RAEE vr RMWY EXTENSION RAMBE OM INT NDB VIEWING RANGE TSK OD E n VOR VIEWING RANGE aso Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance 2 Figure 3 55 Navigation Map VOR Viewing Range Selection g 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active y EE turn the large MFD knob to highlight the VOR Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value UO lt Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Sec 7 Symbols Sm Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 3 40 Garmin G600 Pilot
174. arte E i i Sec 7 Symbols Figure 3 41 Navigation Map Field of View Selection Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 28 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Field of View option Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted plOMal WWa1sAS 99S Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option E JE TEACX Li zm ddd C 298 Field of View Borders e2UPepIOAV piezeH SoJn eo euonippy s y 8 unuuv Figure 3 42 Navigation Map Field of View on the MFD y xipueddy leSsO D sioquJ S g 29S 29S Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 29 adi 99 7 29S G 29S 9 29 GARMIN 3 3 10 2 Weather Feature Options Optional The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the NEXRAD Viewing Range NEXRAD Cell Movement and Lightning Viewing range Weather is an optional feature that requires a GDL 69 69A and an XM WX Satellite Weather subscription or other weather product such as GFDS 1 While viewing the Navigation Map
175. at such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Garmin FliteCharts and SateTaxi are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries SVTTM and G600 are trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen Inc SkyWatch is a registered trademark of L 3 Avionics Systems Sirius and XM are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc Iridium is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications Inc Canadian radar data provided by Environment Canada United States radar data provided by NOAA European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France August 2012 Printed in the U S A A GARMIN AVIATION LIMITED WARRANTY All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase for new Remote Mount and Panel Mount products one year from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly overhauled products six months for newly overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center and 90 days for factory repaired or newly overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair Within the applicable p
176. ates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft amp Refer to AFM for procedures for TAWS alerts TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources o Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO CI151b 4 10 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 3 Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level MSL based altitude GPS MSL altitude and is used to determine TAWS alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is u affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude 5 source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to Mean Sea Level Using the GPS po
177. base At system power up the IGRF models in the GRS 77 and in the Navigation Database are compared and if the IGRF model in the GRS 77 is out of date the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77 The following prompt will appear after the G600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD did 7 29S GRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE UPDATE FROM yyyy TO yyyy e g 2005 to 2012 3IN Follow the on screen instructions 1 When the Update message appears to start the update process press the ENT key with OK highlighted To update at another time turn the Large knob to highlight Cancel and then press ENT 92UPDpIOAV Qo binis EET Hg Van aia a ELLE ORNIN 3 wv c ADVISORY 3 Figure 1 15 GRS MV DB Update 3 I 2 After the update is complete press the ENT key to continue normal operation 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 13 3S unuuy euonippy pJezer 9 29 998 8 29S g xipueddy y 23S G 29 A GARMIN 1 4 System Operation NOTE Refer to Section 6 for detailed descriptions of all alerts and annunciations 1 4 1 Pilot Controls The GDU 620 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time required to access functionality Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and are comprised of a PFD knob MFD dual concentric knobs bezel keys and soft keys 1 4 1 1 PFD Knob zt Pressing t
178. bels for the reference markers may vary as configured during installation S OQWAS 29 e Reference Marker V2 Reference Marker V1 Reference Marker leSsO D 8 29S Vr Reference Marker y xipuaddy Figure 2 11 Alternate Reference Speeds Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun A GARMIN 2 3 Attitude Indicator Foreword Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line The Attitude Indicator displays pitch roll and slip skid information Roll Pointer Roll Scale 7 3 Aircraft Symbol m N 4 Horizon Line y n 4 5 Land Representation 6 Pitch Scale Sec 1 System Mm D A E 7 Slip Skid Indicator Sky Representation 5 C Roll Scale Zero Figure 2 12 Attitude Indicator Hazard Avoidance Features The horizon line is part of the pitch scale Above and below the horizon line major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10 up to 80 Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5 increments up to 25 below and 45 lt above the horizon line Between 20 below to 20 above the horizon line minor pitch marks occur every 2 5 lerts Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale Major tick marks are 30 and 60 and minor tick marks are 10 20 and 45 are shown to the left
179. ble for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the GDU 620 It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit WARNING The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters such as the output from the GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer or other altimeters in aircraft GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation Always use pressure altitude displayed by the GDU 620 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft WARNING Do not use outdated database information Databases used in the G600 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk WARNING Do not use basemap land and water data information for primary navigation Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to enhance situational awareness Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN WARNING Traffic information shown on the GDU 620 Multi Function Display is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic W
180. c LRU Contact your Garmin dealer for service 6 7 A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action 5 MANIFEST e lt LRU gt software e Contact your Garmin dealer for mismatch service communication halted NAV1 2 e Communication with e Switch to alternate navigation NAV1 2 is lost GPS or otherwise if available e No navigation receiver 1 2 data NO RADAR e No data is being sent e Contact your Garmin dealer for DATA to the GDU service PREV EXCEED Previous Engine e Refer to ADAS documentation for Trend Monitor appropriate action 5 exceedence ri e ADAS engine trend monitor is E reporting a previous exceedence RADAR e Data does not match e Contact your Garmin dealer for CONTROLS for 15 seconds or service DISAGREE more SIMULATOR Simulator mode is Simulator mode is active active Do not use for E navigation SVT DISABLED Outside of terrain Repeat steps to reactivate SVT gt database coverage with the appropriate PFD soft keys g t area Terrain database Install 9 arc second database resolution is too low gt SW MISMATCH GDU software Contact your Garmin dealer for version mismatch No service GDU crossfill 6 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action TDB e Airframe does not z support Terrain S database TERRAIN DSP Terrain airport e Update database A terrain or obstacle database error in TAWS B or T
181. cally disconnect s y 8 unuuy 9 298 A NOTE Only appears with the installation of an optional GAD 43 Adapter leSSO D sioquJ S g 28S S y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy Figure 5 27 Check Attitude Autopilot Automatically Disconnected 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 3 A GARMIN E Hy the aircraft manually and crosscheck the GDU 620 attitude indication with the standby attitude indicator and other sources of attitude information airspeed heading altitude etc 3 5 6 2 Heading The GDU 620 heading bug may be used in conjunction with the Heading mode of supported autopilots When the autopilot is in heading mode and y amp the heading bug is adjusted in the normal manner and the autopilot will turn toand maintain the selected heading Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot ve heading mode Selected Heading Box Figure 5 28 Adjusting the Heading Bug 5 6 3 Altitude Capture Optional Upgrade The GDU 620 altitude bug may be used to automatically capture a selected 5 altitude with certain autopilots Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the altitude preselect feature if available TH 52 E S LL lt nnul 5 Adjust the altitude bug in the normal manner when using the altitude capture interface Some a
182. cast ii L zm z A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air A blue line with blue triangles that point in the direction of the cold air flow w o Figure 4 53 XM Weather Cold Front A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air An orange line with orange half moons that point in the direction of the warm air flow B 4H d Figure 4 54 XM Weather Warm Front 4 70 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN A Stationary Front is a front with very little horizontal movement The line alternates with orange and blue sections which point in opposite directions to symbolize little movement z Figure 4 55 XM Weather Stationary Front Dy An Occluded Front is where a cold front has overtaken and merged witha 5 warm front The line alternates with the blue triangle and orange half moon sym bols on the same side of the line pointing in the direction the front is moving a a 3E Figure 4 56 XM Weather Occluded Front Surface Data Viewing Range e The Surface Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Surface Data weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Surface Data will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selected Surface data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower gt lt e e T 2 e rar G 39S DATA LIMK SETUP SeJni1eaJ eu
183. ch the GDU vertical scan display This occurs whenever the aircraft pitch is not at 0 degrees To compensate for this the GDU vertical display will erase the portion of the vertical display that is no longer being scanned It will appear that the vertical sweep wraps around when reaching the end of the GDU vertical display The radar is simply erasing the portion of the vertical display that is not currently being scanned NOTE Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant adjustment of the Bearing Line 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 93 gt zZ 2 T E e a gt pJezey Y 29 Sec4 TO N 1 au a br S s A GARMIN 1 While in the Horizontal Scan view press the CONTROL and then the BRG soft keys This displays the Bearing Line OR Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Show Bearing Line menu item and press the ENT key This displays the Bearing Line 2 Press the MFD knob to activate the Bearing Line Adjustment in the Control window Turn the Large MFD knob to highlight the Bearing value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically scanned TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN CAL m Figure 4 79 Bearing Line Adjustment 4 Press the VERTICAL soft key A vertical slice of the selected area will
184. d 200 fee Indicated Airspeed Both IAS 35 kts Inhibited Foreword Roh AL degrees O Table 2 3 Miscompare Conditions Sec 1 System N vA o Qo S A MISCOMP annunciation is displayed on the airspeed tape if a miscompare condition exists for indicated airspeed A MISCOMP annunciation is displayed lt on the altitude tape if a miscompare condition exists for altitude A PITCH MISCOMP annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for pitch and not roll A ROLL MISCOMP annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for roll and not pitch An ATTITUDE MISCOMP annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for both pitch and roll Sec 4 Hazard Avo Pitch and Roll Miscompare Features Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Airspeed HIS MM Altitude Miscompare Miscompare Pitch Miscompare Roll Miscompare Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Figure 2 43 Miscompare Annunciations Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 30 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2 9 Radar Altimeter When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed the altitude received from the radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD DJOM9JOJ NOTE See the Radar Altimeter documentation for details on the radar altimeter performance and limitations 29 cn lt cn er
185. d Source eus lt 2 Crosstrack 5 Error CDI lt L 2 Figure 2 29 Course Deviation Indicator 2 20 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN A NOTE The ILS Localizer and Glideslope deviation indicators will indicate full scale deflection for the GNS 480 navigator at the second dot The GNS 400W 500W series navigators will indicate full scale deflection at the edge of the display 2 7 1 Changing CDI Sources The CDI can display two sources of navigation GPS or NAV VOR and LOC Color indicates the current navigation source magenta for GPS or green for VOR and LOC The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS derived distance when coupled to GPS When coupled to a VOR or localizer LOC the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale two dots while coupled to GPS the crosstrack error XTK is displayed below the white aircraft symbol e bi voc mw QU Navigator 1 Navigator 1 fae VLOC Navigator 2 24 CDI amp e IM Navigator 2 Figure 2 30 CDI Navigation Sources 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 21 O PJOM 104 UJa1s g 29 ddd C 9 e2UPpIOAV CI piezeH c 29g Y 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv Alesso s sioquu S SHa V 8 g 28g L 28g unuuv 9 298 G 29 y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy A GARMIN 1 Press the CDI soft key to toggle between GPS and VOR LOC source type E
186. d lightning strikes A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer region The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed E TT CDM NEXRAD Lewend zR Echo Tus Dota Viewing Rae Cinu Tas Duta Vinuiss Range P Liahknins Deta Viowlna Renae Coli How Dati Vittvina Rug 2 gt zZ a T e rar Winds Alert Altituda thing Figure 4 45 Lightning Viewing Range Selection A ERE ALERTS SoJnjeo euontppv G 99S Lightning Data Viewing Range The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Lightning will not be shown In the figure above where 300 NM is selected NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and lower SUe v 8 unuuv 9 298 y Xipueddy Alesso s sioqui S 8 29 LS x pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 63 A GARMIN 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Lightning Data Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to c
187. dar detects only precipitation not clouds or turbulence The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection It also has the ability to detect and provide distance to objects on the ground such as cities mountains coastlines rivers lakes and oceans gt lt T A rar 4 10 1 2 Antenna Beam Illumination SoJnjeo euontppy It is important to understand the concept of the antenna beam illumination The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight The farther the beam travels the wider it gets The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam SUV 8 uhuuv 9 29 Antares gi toes TEE sioqui g Klesso D Figure 4 67 Radar Beam from 12 inch Antenna y xipuaddy The vertical dimensions of the radar beam are shown in the figure above and the same holds true for the horizontal dimensions In other words the beam will be as wide as it is tall Note that it is possible not to see areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting With the antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 NM The Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 81 299 C 298 298 29 8 295
188. data E E will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower IR SAT Date Vipwins Range Sec 4 S CE N S lt aditional AT FA reatures Figure 4 110 GFDS IR SAT Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to Rex highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight IR SAT Data Viewing Range Turn the lt small MFD knob to highlight the desired value 5 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Alert OOD 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 116 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 9 Data Link Lightning DL LTNG Data Viewing Range Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud to ground lightning strikes A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer region The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern Canada cloud to cloud strikes are not reported T TRIG pJezey Y 29 gt zZ O e T E e rar ALERTS Figure 4 111 GFDS Data Link Lightning and Legend 190 00601 02 Rev F Gar
189. de E E heading GPS three dimensional position and a database of terrain obstacles and other relevant features The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD R Flight Path Marker Horizon Heading Marks u Traffic Display is Airport Signs Runway Display Terrain Alerting Obstacle Alerting D e lt 2 5 v e Water Zero Pitch Line unuuv V D 4 VIn rl l P g Xipuedawv 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 3 A GARMIN Optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS or standard Terrain SVT is integrated within SVT to provide visual and audible alerts to indicate the presence of terrain threats relative to the projected flight path In addition to the standard TAWS or Terrain SVT alerts SVT offers a three dimensional view of terrain and obstacles Terrain and or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft in flight are shaded yellow or red Foreword Sec 1 System A NOTE SVT will become disabled if the databases necessary to display SVT are unavailable generating a GDU DB ERR or SVT DISABLED alert or AHRS or GPS data is unavailable SVT may be restored once the fail conditions are removed by reactivating SVT as explained in the SVT Operation section Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 M THAN Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Jud Tu S eS LL lt Ba mr EIE If h Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts STATES TIT i EET
190. dependent on two way line ol s sight communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar Whenever the 33 structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna usually located on the underside of the aircraft and the ground based radar antenna the signal may be temporarily interrupted Other limitations and anomalies 5 associated with TIS are described in the AIM Section 1 3 5 4 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN O J DJOM9 aache UJ91SAS Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA Refer to the Aeronautical Information v Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map covering the U S Z 286 A NOTE TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U S v particularly in mountainous regions Also when flying near the floor of radar coverage in a particular area intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS gt z T E e rar TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs Therefore the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old In order to present the intruders in a real time position the TIS ground station uses a predictive algorithm in its tracking software This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their exp
191. destination Ident Facility and City is shown but may be changed to find information about other choices Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor These fields may not be selected if the RWY APT DIR or WX pages are selected If viewing those pages press the soft key for that page again to return to the Waypoint Information page 3 Usethe large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change and use the small MFD knob to change the value 4 Press the ENT key to save the selected value or press the small MFD knob to cancel editing 3 84 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Runway Information Selection Information is provided for each runway showing the following detail runway number runway length surface type and the frequency for Pilot Controlled Lighting PCL Runway Number d ducis Runway Length amp Width Runway Surface Pilot Controlled Lighting Frequency Figure 3 119 Waypoint Runway Information 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 Usethelarge MFD knob to highlight the Runway and use the small MFD knob to display the available runways ze T A C w 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel editing Facility Frequency Selection The Frequency window at the bottom of the Waypoint Information page shows the
192. device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation A NOTE Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater y than 75 North or 60 South e A NOTE This product its packaging and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like additional information please refer to our web site at www garmin com prop65 A NOTE Terrain SVT is standard when the Synthetic Vision Technology _ SVT option is installed The TAWS option will take precedence over Terrain PZ7P NOTE Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering SafeTaxi and Chartview functions have not been qualified to be used as an airport moving map display AMMD SafeTaxi and Chartview are intended to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations should only be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface EUOILIPP unuu 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide V Foreword A GARMIN Record of Revisions Part Number Revision Date Description O R 7 8 08 Update information 2 C 4 15 09 Revision reflects functionality added wi
193. display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft SVT information is shown on the primary flight display PFD Forewor 5 1 Viewing Charts System When the Chart function is available charts will be shown on the third page of the Flight Plan page group The chart page will default to the nearest airport if no flight plan or destination airport is present While you are on the ground the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of flight plan PFD MFD NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will automatically be selected ue w gt a gt lt P LL amp Alerts Symbols Figure 5 1 ChartView Chart Page Figure 5 2 FliteChart Chart Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan FPL page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the Charts page Appendix A Index 5 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 1 1 Chart Panning More detail on the displayed chart can be viewed by zooming in with the Range keys and moving the chart around with pan mode DJOM9JOJ eo NOTE Panning mode is indicated by the presence of scroll bars Ul91s g 29 D Vertical Scroll Bar 298 r Vo cn i EP hira Tt gi tar avi ele Br CA wis 3 i47 ohio eDUPpIOAV Z T 29 Horizontal Scroll Bar TI t te e a n Jeuonippy Figure 5 3 Zooming and Scrolling Around a Char
194. e 1 2 or 3 Forecasts are available for intervals of current 12 24 36 and 48 hours You may also select an interval by pressing the SRFC TIME soit key on the Wx Data Link Map page MFD CY I ap N d ce co N UO a 4 lt L DATA LINK SETUP Pee B s Trok un HEXRAO Ooty Viewing Rune OFF HEXRAD Legend un Echo Top Dota Virwine Ronen TEON Cloud Tos Duta Viewisa Ranga gfi Lishtnims Data Vinwins Auna IAH Gell Hev Data Viewing Runas SOR SIG AIR Viewing Runas 3DOrnn METAR Datu Viewing Ronga TSE Serfocn Oste Viewing Renee 158mm Serfocn Dato Tinn LiF Fre Lui Data Viewing Fangn Winds Aloft Doto Vinwing Rave Wins Aloft Aftitudn County Dato Virwing Fann Annun amp Alerts Features Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary a Ly Figure 4 58 Surface Data Time Selection Appendix A While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Index No Appendix B Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Surtace Data Time value 4 72 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to lt the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4
195. e Tes O PR E E e A 2 28 2 8 5 Marker Beacon Annunciations eeseeeeeeeee 2 29 oc 2 8 6 MISCOmpare ANNUNCIAtIONS dicn senccensviinpeuectagdectatlesseusstnddenten ey 2 29 5 29 RadarAltimeter ssssss 2 31 2 10 Fast Slow Indication RR NER 2 32 a da PODEA UN Siessen egni Epi a i 2 33 g 3 Multi Function Display MFD nennen 3 1 3 1 Functional Display Masi ncsevesstcdsncasaededesstesauestncdedepseassestundedensuadenesauedstas 3 2 NUM ED a E E ape eee kaneis 3 3 x 5 3 3 Navigation Map Pages ssssseenetntnnns 3 4 3 3 1 Default Navigation Map Page sseeeenee 3 5 332 Editing Wt OATI REO Deseo trenes er tuer e et ues ros entera intus 3 5 229 9 Selecting Page Options 3 5 3 3 4 Changing the Navigation Map Range eese 3 6 3 3 5 Decl ttering Map Pauesascaiiesupksttum m tnreb irr eh Pte tees 3 6 3 3 6 ENa o E N E E A E E sees 3 8 3 334 Selecting Items on the Map eeeenne 3 9 3 3 8 Measuring Distances E 3 10 vill Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 9 Customizing Navigation Map Pages SN EE COR rr 3 3 10 1 Map Feature ODEO IS ussnesest orn isia aee tice iere timet nsi Peirus 3 3 10 2 Weather Feature Options Optional 3 3 10 3 Traffic Feature Options Optional sess 3 3 10 4 Aviation Feature Options seeenenne 3 3 11 Split Screen O
196. e Date age Time Time Format Time Offset 2 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 21 A GARMIN Category Settings Affected Quantities Exceptions Distance and Imperial SM MPH Bearing distances Airspeed Speed Metric KM KPH information windows Indicator Nautical NM KT Distance information True Airspeed window Wind speed Flight plan distances vector Map ranges Map range DIS field Navigation Status Traffic Page Box Terrain All distances on MFD Proximity All speeds on MFD Page Altitude and Feet All elevations on MFD Altimeter Vertical Speed Meters Vertical Speed Indicator Navigation Magnetic North Heading Angle True North Course Bearing Track Desired Track Barometric Inches in Barometric pressure on PFD Setting Hectopascals hpa B Temperature Celsius All temperatures on PFD P Fahrenheit b E Table 1 2 Display Units Settings System Setup Page More detail on changing settings is in the Section 3 MFD Aux pages System 5 Settings section 1 22 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 4 5 Display Backlighting The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel keys can be lt adjusted automatically or manually The default setting automatic backlighting adjustment uses the photocell located at the top right corner of the bezel to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions Photocell calibration PASE curves are config
197. e displayed in their approximate respective location as determined by the related traffic systems either TIS or TAS Traffic is displayed in three dimensions appearing larger as they are getting closer and smaller _ when they are further away Traffic symbol coloring and shaping is the same as d Forewo LO Sec 2 Hazard Avoidance Annun Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B PFD System MFD amp Alerts Appendix A Index that used for traffic displayed in the inset moving map or MFD traffic page 5 44 Iraffic on PFD s sra Us 75 ne umb a Papo GEADHSE Au gt S ORCHARD ae uS e Figure 5 46 Traffic Depiction on PFD and MFD Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 7 3 7 Obstacles Obstacles are represented on the synthetic display by standard two dimensional tower symbols found on the MFD maps and charts Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft DJOM9JOJ Wass 29 Obstacle Alert ddd C 298 di 298 Obstacle e2UPepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S Figure 5 47 Obstacle Depiction on PFD Unlike the MFD moving map display obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircrafts flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircrafts altitude are not
198. e factors have an effect on the return intensity The more energy that dissipates the lesser the displayed intensity of the return Accuracy of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect Make maneuvering decisions with this information in mind Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in a shaded area 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key 2 To activate or deactivate the WATCH feature press the WATCH soft key 4 08 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN BEING i E REARING SECTOR SCAN rt TER SECTOR BEEN hil DEL Figure 4 86 Horizontal Scan without WATCH Eine 4 87 7 Horizontal San with WATCH 4 10 6 8 Weather Alert GWX Radars Only The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy radar returns beyond the currently displayed range Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low a weather alert can be generated by ground returns Weather Alerts WEATHER Figure 4 88 Weather Alert Display If a Weather Alert is detected within x10 of the aircraft heading an text alert will be displayed on the MFD in the Alerts Window These text Weather Alerts can be deactivated without deactivating the red bands on the radar display 190 00601
199. e five hundred aural callout provided by TAWS B is not in relation to the optional radar altimeter if installed Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 23 Sec4 A GARMIN 4 4 7 7 Negative Climb Rate After Take Off Alert NCR The Negative Climb Rate NCR After Take Off alert also referred to as Altitude Loss After Take Off provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude closing upon terrain after takeoff The aural message Dont Sink is given for NCR alerts accompanied by an annunciation and a pop up terrain alert on the display NCR alerting is only active when departing 5 o 2 No lt from an airport and when the following conditions are met Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO C151b are shown below 1000 T DON T SINK Height Above Terrain Feet pp 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Altitude Loss Feet 1000 900 800 NE ML EE DON T SINK BEE 12 E Height Above Terrain Feet 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Sink Rate Feet Per Minute Figure 4 21 Negative Climb Rate NCR Alert Criteria 4 24 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 7 8
200. e hazardous weather Instead use it in an early warning capacity of pre departure and en route evaluation E Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown 5 This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps The display of the information is color coded to indicate the weather severity level All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data 4 54 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Link Page For the NEXRAD legend select the LEGEND soft key when NEXRAD is selected for display NERD al Hidu pg Pn ER Hm 23 Er 1H Do E LISTRI hEXSD CELL FEN Prase the EHT ke fo ratura to the bae ma F LEDEWD ALERTS Figure 4 36 NEXRAD Weather Legend The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops gt z T E e rar information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in grayish purple 4 9 5 1 X Reflectivity Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere Simply put certain types of weather reflect radar better t
201. e small MFD knob to activate the cursor 3 Use the small or large MFD knob to scroll through the information 4 Press the small MFD knob to deactivate the cursor Press the APT DIR soft key again to return to the Waypoint Information page 3 86 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 5 2 4 Waypoint Weather Information Optional The Weather information function is available if a data link receiver isinstalled 5 a weather subscription is current and weather information is available for the selected waypoint METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Waypoint Weather Information Page Pressing the WX soft key will show the weather information page METAR data is displayed first then TAF information is displayed TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast isthe standard format for 24 hour weather forecasts A TAF typically forecasts significant weather changes temporary changes probable changes and expected changes in weather conditions Figure 3 122 Waypoint Weather Information Textual METARs and TAFs 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint j 2 Usethe small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available information 3 Press the small MFD knob to return to the main Flight Plan page 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 87 A GARMIN 3 5 3 Charts Page Optional Charts w
202. ected Restricted airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower Foreword Sec 1 System NAVIGATION HAP 2 SETUP Sec 2 PFD MD g n RESTRICTED Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 3 59 Navigation Map Restricted Airspace Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Restricted Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Sec 7 Symbols UO Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Sec 8 Glossary Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 44 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A MOA Military Viewing Range The MOA Military viewing range option selects whether MOA Military information is shown on the Navigation Map MOA airspace information will gt be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 200 NM is selected MOA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower UJ91s gG 29S ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUEpIOAV piezeH y 29 HOA HILITARY uico TFR SoJn ea jeuonipp
203. ected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit Occasionally aircraft maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display These errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector it will lag intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in see and avoid Some of the more common examples El of these errors follow I e 9U 9 29 9 unuuy su Jy AA 29g sioqui g When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes fesso 2 e When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft course at a shallow angle either overtaking or head on and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0 25 NM TIS may display the intruder on gt the opposite side of the client than it actually is Udd These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few T radar scans once the course has stabilized g Mns 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 43 A GARMIN 4 8 4 TIS Alerts 5 When the number of Traffic Advisories TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next the following occur A single Traffic voice alert is generated A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude I
204. el for distribution of the audio signal A subscription to the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69 69A capability Sec 2 PFD Subscription information is available at http Avww garmin com xm Sec 3 MFD Hazard Avoidance Figure 1 9 GDL 69 69A XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver 1 1 10 GAD 43 43e Optional The GAD 43 is an adapter that converts AHRS digital pitch roll heading and yaw rate data into analog signals used by autopilot systems The GAD 43 is installed remotely between the AHRS and an existing autopilot The analog signals trom the GAD 43 mimic those of spinning mass gyros that provide data to the autopilot and allow the gyro to be replaced by the AHRS and GAD 43 combination Annun amp Alerts Features Sec 7 Symbols The GAD 43e performs the same functions as the GAD 43 but adds support for additional interfaces to various aircraft systems The GAD 43e supports interfaces to various autopilots for altitude preselect and vertical speed control analog NAV radios DME analog radar altimeters marker beacons and ADF receivers Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 1 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Figure 1 10 GAD 43 43e AHRS Adapter 1 1 11 GWX 68 Weather Radar The Garmin GWX system or selected 3rd party radar provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD Figure 1 11 GWX 68 Weather Radar 1 1
205. eld model should be upgraded Contact your Garmin dealer for service Check ADC cable Contact your Garmin dealer for service 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action disabled z available service Dy service service CNFG e GDU 1 2 airframe Contact your Garmin dealer for MISMATCH configuration settings service disagree CNFG MODULE GDU configuration Contact your Garmin dealer for module is service inoperative DATA LOST e Pilot stored data was e Reset your settings lost Recheck data e G600 pilot configurable items have and settings been returned to default settings DIAG MODE e System is in Diagnostic Mode ETM CAPTURE e Engine Trend Monitor e Refer to ADAS documentation for Kam data capture appropriate action e ADAS engine trend 3 g monitor is recording trend data ETM EXCEED e Engine Trend Monitor e Refer to ADAS documentation for gt exceedence advisory appropriate action i e ADAS engine trend monitor is reporting E an exceedence or advisory condition 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 6 3 A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action 5 ETM FAULT e Engine Trend Monitor e Refer to ADAS documentation for needs service appropriate action e ADAS engine trend monitor is reporting he a system fault FAN 1 2 FAIL e Cooling fan 1 2has e Contact your Garmin dealer for aie failed service
206. en turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight Test TAWS gt z T E e rar G 29 S9JnjeeJ euonippy sue v 8 unuuv 9 29S up the HPO kah to mia te fee po Figure 4 14 TAWS Page Menu SJOQUIAS G A jpcecn AJ8SSO J ddy XIpuet g xipusddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 15 XB oN HH amp m Avoidance A GARMIN 3 Press the ENT key to contirm the selection One of the following aural messages is generated TAWS System Test OK e TAWS System Failure TAWS TEST is annunciated in yellow on the TAWS page and in white on the PFD i l IIT AHS TEST S 20 b Nr P Figure 4 15 TAWS Test Display and PFD Annunciation 4ega 4 16 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 4 7 TAWS Alerts Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS software algorithms When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued TAWS alert types are shown in the TAWS Alerts Summary Table 4 4 with corresponding annunciations and aural messages DJO0M9JOJ cn UJ91s g When an alert is issued annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD TAWS page only The TAWS Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD If the TAWS page is not displayed at the time a pop up alert appears on the M
207. eriod Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that 2 2 fail in normal use Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty does not apply to i cosmetic damage such as scratches nicks and dents ii consumable parts such as batteries unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship iii damage caused by accident abuse misuse water flood fire or other acts of nature or external causes iv damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin or v damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin In addition Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and or used in contravention of the laws of any country THEWARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING lt UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE INNOEVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FORANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE
208. erms MIB Doto Viraina Aman Lightnime Doto Viewing Arae Call Pas Data Vimi Range SIG AIF Virina Aarya HETARA Detn Viewing Fanse Surface Deta Viewing Ranae Surfece Geto Tin Fre Lvl Deto Viewing Range Winds Gioft Data Vievieg Ron Winds Aloft DELIS County Dota Viewing Ange Cyclone Deto Viewing Pone Press the HFD knob to return to bose pme Figure 4 32 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option DATA LINK SETUP Map Orientation Track up NEXRAD Duta Viewing Runge 2 UIDI NH NEXRAD Legend Echo Top Data Viewing Range Cloud Top Data Viewing Range Lightning Data Viewing Range Cell Moy Data Viewing Range SIG AIR Viewing Range METAR Data Viewing Range Surface Data Viewing Range Figure 4 33 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Option Selection Press ENT to save a selection 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 49 DJOM9JOJ UJ91s g 299 ddd 28S 7 29S Q3IN jessoJb sioqu S sue v 9 saJnjea 8 29 L 29 unuuy euonppy y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy G 29 9 29 Sec4 TO N 1 au a S r A GARMIN 5 Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD knob to cancel and return to the XM WX Satellite Weather Data Link Map Page WX Page Menu Weather Setup Mention O OO Adustnent Table 4 20 Weather Page Menu Setup Options 4 9 3 XM WX Weather Symbols and Product
209. est the downloading of weather products Requests can 5 be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Ns 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight GFDS Data Request Press ENT OPTIONS GFOS Doto Reques Displpy XH Weother Register With GFDS wether Setup Weather Legend Press the HFD knob to return to bose page Figure 4 99 Select GFDS Data Request 9 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to the next position GFOS DATA REQUEST amp PRESENT POSITION DESTINATION FLIGHT PLAN BAYPOINT DIAHETER RTE WIDTH AUTO REGLIEST UPDATE RATE Harel REQUEST SEN REG REQUEST STATUS OK Next auto updatg 5 Minutes Press the MFD knob to return to bose page Figure 4 100 GFDS Data Request Page 4 108 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 5 1 GFDS Data Request Coverage Present Position GFDS Data Request 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight GFDS Data Request Press ENT 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Present Position Press ENT 4 The Present Position box will be checked and weather information will be requested around your present position 3 5 To deselect Present
210. etric Setting System Display Units 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 59 A GARMIN 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Barometric Setting units and then press ENT The Temperature value will now be highlighted Figure 3 79 Temperature System Display Units 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temperature units and then press ENT 3 4 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information Optional The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius XM Satellite radios service and products when the GDL 69 694 is installed and the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated WEATHER FRETE Figure 3 80 XM Information 3 60 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment Radio Optional Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A The GDU 620 serves as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 694 Sirius XM Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signal from satellites coverage far exceeds land based transmissions When enabled the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux Mode The information on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of
211. f the FPL page group press the SELECT soft SEN key gt C 2 Tum the small MFD knob counterclockwise 3 Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to show FPL NRST or RECENT 4 Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired identifier and then press ENT pJezeH Tl fa fe e 1 n Jeuonippy G 99S 5 1 5 Charts Menu Selections 1 In the FPL page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Charts page 2 Press MENU to display the Options menu z PAGE MENU OPTIONS Press the HFD knot to raturo to bose page Figure 5 8 Chart Menu Selections 3 Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired item and then press ENT Lp Saal cy y XIpu ddy X pU 4 VIn rl zl F g Xipuedawv 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 A GARMIN 5 1 5 1 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 1 While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group press the Menu Key 7 With the Set Minimums item highlighted press ENT 2 With the Minimums Source highlighted select the Altitude Minimums Alerter source with small MFD knob SOURCE 1i ALTITUDE Figure 5 9 Barometric Minimums Source Selection 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value Turn the large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value and then press ENT to activate the selected value SOURCE RAD ALTITUDE Tu n TE Lc nS oO L lt Figure 5 10 Barometric Minim
212. fined in TSO C151b Garmins G600 Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS B is an optional feature and is intended to provide the flight crew with both 2 aural and visual alerts to aid in preventing inadvertent Controlled Flight Into Terrain CFIT Terrain SVT Refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that will meet the terrain alerting requirements outlined in Section 7 b of AC 23 26 Terrain SVT is a subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality gt including visual alerting and aural alerting Terrain SVT is provided with the Synthetic Vision functionality and not marketed separately 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 1 A GARMIN NOTE Terrain SVT is not a fully functional TAWS and does not meet the TAWS TSO C151b Terrain Proximity Refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map No aural alerts of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity configuration During power up of the GDU 620 the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer At the same time the Terrain system self test begins A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails Alert Source MFD Terrain Aural Obstacle Callouts Alerts G600 Terrain PFD SVT Terrain Configuration Annunciator Obstacle Text Shading Sec 4 Terrain Proximity oc o oc o Terrain Proximity w GNS GTN GNS GTN TAWS pos TAWS 5 o 2 No se lt
213. frequencies available for the selected waypoint A scroll bar is shown on the right side of the Frequency window if more frequencies are available TREGUCHC TES Figure 3 120 Waypoint Frequency Information 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and then press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the available frequencies 3 Press the small MFD knob to exit 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 85 A GARMIN 3 5 2 3 Airport Directory The Airport Directory lists extensive information about the selected airport and the surrounding area The RWY FREQ and APT DIR soft keys are greyed out and not functional unless the selected waypoint is an airport or heliport A NOTE Airport Directory information comes from a database provided by various 3rd parties Refer to the Database information in the AUX SYSTEM STATUS page for details on the installed Airport Directory database IDENT FACILITY CITY AIRPORT DIRELTORY Control Tower Hours Facility Hours Noise Abotement Airport bstructiont Pattern Altitudes AIRPORT DIRECTORY EL TTR g Lt L Figure 3 121 Airport Directory Information 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the APT DIR soft key to view more information about the waypoint lt 2 Press th
214. ft In this manner Terrain Proximity provides awareness of surrounding terrain conditions Terrain requires the following to operate properly The system must have a valid 3 D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain obstacle airport terrain database 4 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 3 1 Displaying Terrain Proximity The Terrain Proximity page is in the Map page group Terrain is also selectable lt on the Navigation Map pages E 4 3 1 1 Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the Terrain page 3 Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys acf UJ9 SAS 299 Map Orientation North Indication Altitude Information A Range Rings j S gt 3 Ownship Symbol at Present Position amp fo gt Va Terrain a5 o Altitude Legend Page Name Cn lt O O un 360 120 Range Ring Arc Selection Selection 1ESSOJD Figure 4 2 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 360 View V XIpuac TOP 0USdOV X9pu q XI 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 A GARMIN System Foreword Sec 1 Sec 2 PFD Terrain Overlay Sec 3 MFD Terrain Scale at Terrain Data Icon E orp MAP Soft Key Figure 4 3 Terrain on Navigation Map Page Sec 4 g es N S lt Sec 5 Additional Features I 3 1 2
215. g Rong Minds Alaft Doto Viewing Pee Winds Filet Fltikode Press the MFD knob to return to bose pige Figure 4 96 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option PRELIP Geto Viewing Range Figure 4 97 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Option Selection Press ENT to save a selection Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD Knob to cancel and return to the GFDS Weather Data Link Map Page 4 106 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN WX Page Menu Weather Setup fk E H Table 4 25 GFDS Weather Page Menu Setup Options 4 11 4 Weather Page Map Orientation The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages 1 While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1 2 or 3 of the Wx page group press the g MENU key With Weather Setup highlighted press ENT 2 With the Map Orientation option active turn the small MFD knob to done the highlighted value gt D pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar Figure 4 98 Weather Page Map Orientation 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 107 GARMIN 4 11 5 GFDS Data Request _ Tt is necessary to requ
216. gure 2 6 Airspeed Tape 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 5 A GARMIN Overspeed Range Barber Pole Foreword Overspeed Indication for Current Airspeed System U D WY Caution Operating Range Figure 2 7 Overspeed Indication 32 2 1 Markings A color coded white green yellow and red white barber pole speed zt range strip is located on the moving tape The colors are configured to match the approved markings for the installation See the AFM POH N S E A NOTE The actual colors and patterns of the airspeed tape may vary by 4 installation See your AFM POH for more details Mino m Vive E P NO L oj FE B Vso 9 E Figure 2 8 Typical Airspeed Tape Markings lt L 2 R 2 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN White Triangle Wse 3 V 3 _ UJa1s g 29 Figure 2 9 Additional Reference Markings 2 2 2 Reference Speeds V speeds Glide V V and V default values are set during the installation process but can be changed and turned on off from the System Setup page on the first page of the Aux page group When active on the V speeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale N 298 e2UPepIOAV piezeH 7 29S Glide Reference Marker Vr Reference Marker Vx Reference Marker SoJn eo euonippy G 298 Vy Reference Marker S y 8 unuuy 9 22S Figure 2 10 Reference Speeds The la
217. hafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados U shaped cloud edges 3 to 7 miles across can also indicate hail These target returns appear quite suddenly along any edge of the cell outline 4 90 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds making vigilant monitoring essential 4 10 6 Radar Operation in Weather Mode WARNING Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so When transmitting while the aircraft is on the ground no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna A CAUTION In Standby mode the antenna is parked at the center line It is always a good idea to put the radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode the system automatically switches to Standby mode on landing Antenna Operatin oe Stabilization Weather Alert Radar Beam GWX Only Scan Line Precipitation Scale ULL BEARING Control SECTOR SCAN Window E croar GAIN WEATHER RADAR T WOT Ena ALERTS Figure 4 76 Horizontal Scan Display 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 91 gt z O a T EI e a gt pJezey 7 22 A GARMIN 4 10 6 1 Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar Page A NOTE Dist
218. han others The intensity of a a pJezey radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level For 4 instance wet hail returns a strong radar reflection while dry hail does not Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels dB relative to reflectivity Z NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver designated by the letter Z The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 55 UJ 7 22 A GARMIN 4 9 5 2 NEXRAD Limitations 2 NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations 2 e NEXRAD composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics For example it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow wet hail and rain NEXRAD composite reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude e storms at close ranges It has no information about storms directly over an the site When zoomed in to a range of 30 NM each square block on the display mo represents an area of four square kilometers The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled within the area The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEX
219. hannel Category Window TT RI volume Bar Graph Page Name Pul ur i Fi CHL ATOR an PRESETS ALERTS i Soft Keys Figure 5 19 Sirius XM Satellite Radio 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 25 GARMIN 5 5 3 1 Channel Categories The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio Categories of channels such as Jazz Rock or News can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other contents Foreword 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the CATGRY soft key to activate Category selection Sec 1 System 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired category When the MFD knob is turned to select a category the soft keys will not be shown Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD b 2 lt eo D N O TELS L gt lt ASAP fr p 3 Sea ee tego fee Annun amp Alerts ux m km Dagmar 5 21 XM Category Soft Keys Sec 7 Symbols 3 Press ENT to display the list of channels for the highlighted category in the Channels window 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing OR 1 Press CATGRY and then the CAT or CAT soft keys to increment up or down one category at a time Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A 2 Press ALL to show the channels for all categories Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel Appendix B Index 3 Press ENT to save the selection or
220. he PFD knob performs the default action for the selected mode Refer to the PFD Bezel Keys section for details w Nn gt ea _ 9 Heading Course Altitude Vertical Soeed Barometer v S Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Figure 1 16 Selection Modes Adjusted with the PFD Knob NOTE After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode the PFD knob selected mode will revert to Heading mode P 1 Press the desired PFD mode selection key HDG CRS ALT V S or BARO A window will be displayed near the upper left corner of the HSI showing the current value for that mode E 2 Tum the PFD knob to select the desired value 1 14 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 4 1 2 PFD Bezel Keys A NOTE See Section 5 6 for autopilot functions using the PFD Bezel Keys Heading HDG Selects Heading Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the current Heading This is the default mode for the PFD knob Set the heading on the HSI by turning the PFD knob after pressing the HDG key Course CRS Selects Course Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Course mode will center the CDI for a VOR or OBS mode course Altimeter ALT Selects Altitude Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Altitude Select mode will enter the current altitude in the Altitude Select window Set the Altitude Bug by turning the PFD knob after pressing the ALT key Altitude Select Window Altitude Bug
221. he figure below where 100 NM is selected an R County data will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower g DATA LINE SETUP Map Grinntut ion Trok up m MEXRAD Dutu Viewing Rano OFT EUN NEXRAD Legend On Echo Ton Dutn Viewing Ransa 158r Cloud Ton Dutn Viewing Ronas OTF I Lishtnins Deta Viewina Remae UDUH rog Call Hov Dun Vleuim Rune E SIG AIR Viewing Ranao Eu gt METAR Oute Viewing Ronse a S N e Suriurr Duta Viewing Rame Biz at Surfact Doku Time 24 HR Fre Lvl Duta Viewing Range Z DINH 2E Winds Aloft Dota Viewing Rege TENH z 2 Winds Alnft Altitud BOTE T oo County Dutu Viewing Runan anui Doty Viewing Rares 9 29 gor L3 D c cb D gt WN Figure 4 66 County D Data Viewing Range Selection sioqui S L 2998 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Alesso 5 8 29S 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the County Data Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted y xipueddy 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 79 A GARMIN 4 10 Weather Radar 5 The G600
222. he small MFD knob again to return to panning 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 9 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Additional Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Foreword PFD OAD E A Features Avoidance amp Alerts Appendix A Index A GARMIN 3 3 8 Measuring Distances The Measure Bearing Distance function provides a quick and easy method to determine the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map 1 NO x 5 3 10 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press MENU Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight Measure Bearing Distance and then press ENT Pras the FEO lech to Bor te bees poo Figure 3 10 Navigation Map Measure Distance Function Your present position will be marked as the starting reference point To choose a different starting reference point turn the large or small MFD knobs to desired point and press ENT Figure 3 11 Measure Distance Starting Reference Point 4 urn the large or small MFD knobs to move the cursor to a reference point The distance and bearing is displayed at the top of the display Distance and Bearing Between Start and End Points Ending Reference Point position Ending Reference Point Starting Reference Point Figure 3 12 Bearing Distance Measurement Press the small MFD knob to stop measuring Garmin G600 P
223. he standard format for current weather observations METARs are generally updated hourly but some site are more frequent Special updates are done as conditions warrant METARs typically contain information about the temperature dew point wind precipitation cloud cover cloud heights visibility and barometric pressure They can also contain information on precipitation amounts lightning and other critical data METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them Sec 4 5 o g NS oe lt Cursor Location Product Age Selected METAR VFR MVFR METAR LELEH BUY L SURT Figure 4 116 GFDS Weather Graphic METARs and Legend 4 122 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN METAR Viewing Range The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where lt at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected E MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected METARs will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selected METAR data will J be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower 3 f qd HETA R Dota Vinuina Ranga piezep 7 29 gt z T E e rar IDDOWV aJn eoJ J Figure 4 117 METAR Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the 4 MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and
224. hen installed are available in the Flight Plan page group ChartView 5 is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan page group z 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the Charts page A NOTE There are two options for chart services FliteCharts or ChartView FliteCharts displays charts that are FAA published ChartView displays charts published by Jeppesen ChartView charts are geo referenced which allows a pink ownship icon to be overlayed on the chart indicating the aircraft location iur VENI AP tec y z H Figure 3 123 Flight Page 3 Charts 3 88 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 5 3 1 Viewing Charts The chart for the selected destination airport or approach is automatically loaded With ChartView only and when available for the selected chart more detail is available DJOM9JOJ 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the RNG Range 979 GUB keys to zoom in and out 2 After zooming in you may only see part of the chart Press the Small MFD knob to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart Turn lt the large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart ul91s g 29S NO NOTE When Panning mode is active scroll bars will be shown on the right side and bottom of the display 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning I O i 5 O N a
225. ht 5 to the Charts page Press ENT to go to Chart Setup The Color Scheme option will be highlighted Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected value and return NOTE Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto mode the chart must be redrawn zoomed in or out or another chart selected before the switch from Day to Night is seen 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 0 A GARMIN 5 2 ChartView Optional ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts The charts are displayed in full color with high resolution The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams Foreword C System Ihe ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen Inc ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Available data includes e Arrivals STAR Departure Procedures DP Sec 2 VIFD z e Approaches Airport Diagrams e Chart NOTAMs Hazard Avoidance Tu S a LL lt e Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Appendix A Glossary Symbols amp Alerts ndex Appendix B 5 10 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 2 1 Cycle Number and Revision The ChartView database is revised every 14 days Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the d
226. i iin Minimums Box cn lt WN rests D 3 mid BARD HIN j B T Figure 2 23 Barometric MDA DH Alerting Visual Annunciations Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the selected Minimum Altitude Normally the altitude alerter only allows selection of altitudes in 100 foot increments When a value other than 100 feet is set for Baro Mins it becomes a selectable value in the altitude alerter In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units e2UPepIOAV Caw pJezeH c 29g Y 29S SoJn eo euonippy G 298 HIHMIMUM SOURCE ALTITUDE sua v 9 unuuv 9 298 Barometric Altitude Radar Altimeter Minimums Bug 200 Foot Difference AJeSSO D 8 299 Brown Band Indicating The Ground 3 Radar Altimeter E Minimums Value Radar Altimeter Value a8 Figure 2 24 Minimums Values with a Radar Altimeter co 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 15 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun U D WY Sec 3 Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A GARMIN Setting the Altitude Minimums Bug is performed on either the FPL Active Flight Plan page or the FPL Charts page Foreword For details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Active Flight Plan page refer to Section 3 MFD Flight Plan Pages F
227. iations SO0W series G600 w PFD annunciations are Generated from G600 aural alerts Terrain SVT and generated from the the G600 are suppressed External TAWS External TAWS Unit Unit Installed MFD Annunciations 500W series are generated from the G600 G600 w TAWS B Annunciations Generated from Not suppressed generated from the the G600 G600 Table 4 8 G600 TAWS Annunciations 4 6 Terrain SVT Garmin Terrain SVI refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that meets the _ terrain alerting requirements outlined in Section 7 b of AC 23 26 Terrain SVT is 3 a subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality with visual alerting and aural alerting Terrain SVT is provided with Synthetic Vision Technology SVI functionality and not marketed separately gt zZ ex T E e a gt pJezey Y 29 Garmin Terrain SVT alerting consists of the following alert types Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA Alerting which consists of Required Terrain Clearance RTC Required Obstacle Clearance ROC 1n Alerting Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Alerting z Garmin Terrain SVT is available in G600 GDU 620 SW version 3 00 and later Garmin Terrain SVT is required for those SVT installations that do not have TAWS A or TAWS B enabled 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 2 Sec4 o TE N lt r A GARMIN 4
228. igure 3 84 External Video Setup 4 After selecting the desired settings press the small MFD knob or the Setup soft key to exit editing 3 64 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Brightness Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the Setup soit key 2 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Brightness value BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 85 External Video Brightness Adjustment 3 After selecting the desired setting turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing Nn e UJ Contrast Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the Setup soft Key 2 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Contrast value Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Contrast value BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 86 External Video Contrast Adjustment 3 After selecting the desired setting turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 65 Sec 4 A GARMIN Saturation Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the Setup soft key 2 The Current value for Brightness will be se
229. ilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 9 Customizing Navigation Map Pages The Navigation Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Map Setup and Measure Bearing Distance The Map Setup choice covers selections for Map Weather Traffic and Aviation depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft 3 3 10 Map Setup The Map Setup selection from the Page Menu allows you to customize the displayed items 1 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu FAJE HEM OPTIONS Pres he HED boh leren lo bi aa Figure 3 13 Navigation Map Page Menu 2 With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option Press the ENT key to display the Map Setup Menu 3 Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Group and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group The groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your aircraft mr Figure 3 14 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 11 Ul91s g DJOM9JO ddd C 298 adi 99 3DULPIONY S9Jn eoJ jeuonippv G 236 leSsO D SJOQWIAS suev 9 unuuv y xipueddy X9pu g xipueddy 298 pJezeH y 29S 2998 8 29 A GARMIN Map Group
230. in G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Squall Line Steep Gradient Hook or Finger Scalloped Edge Figure 4 73 Cell Irregularities Thunderstorm development is rapid A course may become blocked within a short time When displaying shorter ranges periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out That can help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather _ The Blind Alley Figure 4 74 The Blind Alley Overhead View In areas of multiple heavy cells use the Vertical Scan feature along with areas behind targets antenna tilt management to examine the areas Remember to avoid shadowed Figure 4 75 The Blind Alley Horizontal Scan 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 89 Sec4 TO N au A GARMIN 4 10 5 3 Tornadoes There is no conclusive radar target return characteristics which will identity a tornado however tornadoes may be present if the following characteristics are observed a rr S lt A narrow finger like portion as shown on the previous page extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself A hook which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere of a major thunderstorm V shaped
231. ing Romaa Figure 4 49 SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range Selection HIA 298 piezep y 29 gt lt o e T E e rar sounjeo EUONIPPY G 29 SHV 9 unuuy 9 29S 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SIG AIR Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted sioquJ S L 298 Alesso 5 8 29S I gt 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to E the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option I 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 67 A GARMIN 4 9 14 METARs 5 A NOTE Atmospheric pressure reported for METARS is given in hectopascals hPa except in the United States where it is reported in inches of mercury in Hg Temperatures are reported in Celsius Y z A NOTE METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation a database service area 7 METAR METeorological Aerodrome Report known as an Aviation Routine Zt Weather Report is the standard format for current weather observations METARs are updated hourly and are considered current METARs typically contain information about the temperature dew point wind precipitat
232. ing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted sioquJ S L 298 Alesso 5 8 29S I 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option gt I 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 69 Sec4 A GARMIN 4 9 15 Surface Analysis and City Forecast NOTE Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database service area Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and y z forecast weather conditions Forecasts are available for intervals of 12 24 36 and 48 hours by pressing the SRFC TIME soft key or in the Page Menu Weather Setup options When enabled the Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicat ing weather fronts and the direction they are moving High and Low pressure 5 te No lt cd CO LY uw centers are noted with a large H or L The Forecast Time menu item will step through the intervals manually LI U Te ALS Figure 4 52 XM Weather Surface Analysis and City Fore
233. io with either one or two coded IDs depending on the equipment Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID or both must be provided to Sirius XM Satellite Radio to activate the entertainment subscription The Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation z Instructions are included with the unit also available at www garmin com P N 190 00355 04 Sirius XM Satellite Radio and XM WX Satellite Weather subscriptions are T sold separately It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A Either or both services can be activated Sirius XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation 8 signal that when received by the GDL 69A allows it to play entertainment programming TH nm 2 TE Lc NDS o L lt These IDs are located On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver On the XM Information Page on the MFD 23 Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located 5 22 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN NOTE The LOCK soft key on the XM Information Page Auxiliary can Group is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the Sirius X Satellite Radio services are initially set up It is not used during normal 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio operation but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight Refer to the GDL 69 69A Sirius XM
234. ion cloud cover cloud heights visibility and barometric pressure They can also contain information on precipitation amounts lightning and other critical data METARS are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them Sec4 5 v 2 No oe lt Figure 4 50 XM Weather Graphic METARs 4 68 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN METAR Viewing Range The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where lt at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected METARs will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selected METAR data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower UJ91s g 298 DATA LINK SETUP Hop Orientation Trock up NEXRAD Don Viewing Rame OF HEXRAD Legnnd j n Echo Ter Date Viewlns Range 158NH Cloud Tee Deta Wiowina Runge OFF Lishining Dota Virwing Rong SNH Cell Mev Deti Viewing Ronan Ee SIG AIR Viewina Rass ELI HETAR Data Viewina Ranae Surfaca Data Vinsina Ringt i l ddd C 298 HIA 298 7 22 gt lt o e T E e rar pJezey Surfers Deto Tim Fre Lvl Data Viewing Annan Winds Aloft Dota Viewing Fanns Winds Aloft Altitude County Gete Vinwing Forman Cycho Doto Virwlna Ronan saunjed euonippy G 29 1 j d Figure 4 51 METAR Viewing Range Selection SHV 8 unuuy 9 29S 1 While view
235. ion starts at 20 knots regardless of the displayed units oes PA D NOTE Airspeed units KTS MPH KPH are configured to match the approved units for the installation CIN E 286 The Airspeed Indicator provides Indicated Airspeed True Airspeed and Ground Speed The Airspeed Trend Indicator shows what the airspeed will be in six seconds if the current acceleration is maintained The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer y 298 e2UepIOAV piezeH The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical pink magenta line extending up or down on the airspeed scale shown to the right of the color coded speed range 2 strip The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current acceleration is maintained If the trend vector crosses into the overspeed range the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure Ground Speed Caution Range yellow 3 Airspeed Trend Indicator pink magenta line Glide Speed Reference Marker aJn1eoJ EUOIIPPY 33S Say S unuuy 9 298 S og Vr Reference Marker Vx Reference Marker Alesso 5 0 Landing Gear Extension Speed Vy Reference Marker Normal Operating Range Green y xipueddy Flaps Operating Range White TAS 1166 True Airspeed a 8 ME Airspeed Units TE Fi
236. iration date ChartView Jeppesen terminal SD card 14 days on Contact Optional feature procedures Fridays Jeppesen that requires Garmin dealer enablement Disables 70 days after expiration date Table A 1 Database List 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A A GARMIN Jeppesen Databases The aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle Aviation database updates are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin web site fly garmin com onto a Garmin provided Supplemental Datacard Contact Garmin at fly garmin com for aviation database updates and update kits The Aviation database is stored internally and the Datacard is only used to transfer the database into the unit The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Contact Jeppesen www jeppesen com for ChartView subscription and update information Updating the Jeppesen Database 1 With the G600 System OFF insert the SD card containing the aviation database lt aos 5 c D 2 2 lt update into the upper card slot of the GDU 620 to be updated label of SD card should face up 2 Turn the G600 System ON 3 Verity the correct update cycle is loaded during power up Press the ENT key to continue or the CLR key to cancel loading Figure A 1 Database Initialization Displa
237. is an Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS unit that provides aircraft attitude information to the G600 display The unit contains advanced tilt sensors accelerometers and rate sensors In addition the GRS 77 interfaces with both the GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer and the GMU 44 magnetometer The GRS 77 also utilizes GPS data forwarded from the GDU 620 Actual attitude and heading information is sent to the GDU 620 using an ARINC 429 digital interface Additional Hazard Features Avoidance Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Figure 1 5 GRS 77 AHRS The IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only updated once every five years The IGRF model is part of the Navigation Database At system power up the IGRF models in the GRS 77 and in the Navigation Database are compared and if the IGRF model in the GRS 77 is out of date the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77 The prompt will appear after the G600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD endix A Appendix B Index 1 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 1 5 GMU 44 The GMU 44 magnetometer senses the earths magnetic field Data is sent to the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77 using a RS 485 digital interface UJ x Figure 1 6 GMU 44
238. isables date ChartView is disabled 70 days atter the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disable date When turning on the GDU 620 the Power up Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView availability See the table below for the various ChartView Power up Page displays and the definition of each Power up Page Display Definition Blank Line GDU 620 system is not configured for ChartView Contact a Garmin authorized service center for configuration BY Chart Data N A System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database Normal operation ChartView database is valid and within current cycle BY Chart data update available ChartView database is within week after expiration date A new cycle is available for update El A ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date but still within the 70 day viewing period ChartView database has timed out Database is beyond 70 days 8 after expiration date ChartView database is no longer available for viewing Jeuonippy nM ChartView Disables 19 APR 200 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 11 A GARMIN Power up Page Display Definition SES System time is not available 7 GPS satellite data is unknown or the GPS navigator has not yet locked onto satellites Check Zo database cycle number
239. isplay the navigation source keys El 2 Press the BRG 1 or BRG 2 soft keys to toggle between the available Nav 7 receivers of the selected source such as GPS NAV or ADF NOTE The Bearing Line for navigation source 1 BRG1 will be a single line i zi The Bearing Line for navigation source 2 BRG2 will be a double line 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 2 A GARMIN 2 8 2 Temperature Display 5 The Outside Air Temperature OAT is displayed to the left of the HSI The 5 OAT can be displayed in F or C which is configured in the Aux System Setup Page The temperature is derived from the Temperature Probe on the aircraft _ e The displayed temperature is the Static Air Temperature reported by the Air Data Z Computer This temperature value is corrected for ram air heating effects Figure 2 38 HSI Outside Air Temperature 2 8 3 Wind Vectors gt When selected wind vector information is displayed in a window on the PED to the left of the HSI The Wind Vector style is configured in the Aux Mode System Setup page While on the ground the Wind Vector window will indicate LE No Wind Data NO WIND DATA itional Figure 2 39 Wind Vector with No Wind Data Four styles are available as shown below E Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Style 4 m 14 ANUN Figure 2 40 Wind Vector Style 7 2 8 4 DME Indication 7 When selected DME information is displayed in a window in the lower left
240. ited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 NM of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the runway threshold 4 4 7 4 Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert PDA is issued when the system detects that the 2 aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0 5 NM from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the threshold During the final descent algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed distance and other parameters 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 21 Sec 5 Additional Sec 2 Sec 1 Sec 3 Sec Annun Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Foreword PFD MFD a I S s Features amp Alerts Appendix A Index A GARMIN Height Above Terrain Feet 700 600 500 400 300 200 PDA Alerting Area Runway 1 Threshold Distance From Destination Airport nm Figure 4 19 PDA Alerting Threshold PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited Discretion should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when appropriate When TAWS is inhibited the alert annunciation TAWS INHB is shown on the PFD and MFD Figure 4 16 4 22 Garmin G60
241. ition of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database PFD The terrain database is out of date using an older terrain database card Blue Band Sky Representation MFD een D 2100 D cw 5 20ga NE a 1908 E t c Taig I e e ES 8 WO lt L 2s Oo a n T Figure 5 52 Unusual Attitude Display Blue Band z a5 Oo 5 48 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN Brown Band Ground Representation Blue Band Sky Representation Terrain Fills Display cal Figure 5 54 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 49 GARMIN DJOM 10 J Wass 299 ddd C 298 di 298 e2UepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S lt Zz E Q d D gt eo Zz S Cc g lt D O eo Q e E S9 94 jeuonippy G 29 SHV 8 uhuuy 9 29 S OQUIAS LS Klesso c 8 29 y xipueddy X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 50 A GARMIN 6 ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS 6 1 Alerts 2 Alerts are displayed on the MFD and are accessible via the ALERTS MFD soft key When a new advisory is present the ALERTS soft key text changes to _ ADVISORY and flashes until the alerts page is viewed 28 Ihe MFD ALERTS page may have two additional soft keys TRND ACK and CAPTURE which are present when interfaced to an optional ADAS Engine Trend Monitor ETM Pressing
242. ive turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Other ADIZ Viewing Range option Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Sec 8 Glossary WI NS S Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Appendix A gem Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appendix B Index 3 46 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN TFR Viewing Range optional The Temporary Flight Restriction TFR viewing range option selects whether TFR information is shown on the Navigation Map TFR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 500 NM is selected TFR information will be shown at map ranges of 500 NM and lower This optional feature requires an active data link receiver BAFETAXI VIEWING RAMGE lit RWY EXTENSION RANGE xen Figure 3 62 Navigation Map TFR Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group is active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the TFR option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to a
243. k Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected NEXRAD weather data will not be shown In the figure below where 300 NM is selected NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and lower DATA LINK SETUF M E Nui Track ip 3 D NEXRAD Dato Wining Rang OFF Echo Top Dota Viewing Ronse e o Cloud Top Duta Yiowing Russe ae Lightning Dota Viewing Rassa i Cell Hov Dute Vievins Fame gt SIB ATR Viewing Rerum E HETAR Data Vinving Ene a Surfocn Dota Viewing Runge T Figure 4 38 NEXRAD Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Xa PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 A GARMIN The NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value will be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted No x UO Foreword Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 1 System 4 9 8 NEXRAD Legend The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soit key Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD DATA LINK
244. ke mig ee a er n D Per nied Mae AA nt imi unas mor emit eed P m eee ie a hi fhe Pu ai erin ddd C 298 JN 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH V 29S Figure 5 5 Selected Chart for the Current nbn ChartView shown TI a gt te e 1 2 Jeuonippy 5 Press the Select key to choose another chart Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart s y 8 unuuv 9 298 y xipuaddy IeSSO D sioquJ S 8 29 28 Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 5 A GARMIN 5 1 3 Selecting a Chart by Identifier chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for the desired airport Airport Identifier Selection we i lt P NM Tu S a Li lt Figure 5 6 Airport Identifier Selection 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft key to change the airport 2 Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character 3 Use the small MFD knob to change the character s Z 4 Press ENT to accept the selected airport 5 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 1 4 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT S You may select other charts to display based on your flight plan FPL 2 charts of the nearest airport NRST or your most recently selected airports RECENT gy Figure 5 7 Chart Category Selection 1 While viewing the Charts page o
245. lashing pointer will appear in the tip of the ownship symbol The measured information is referenced to the tip of the arrow AN Sec 8 Glossary Ait Figure 3 9 Navigation Map Initial Pointer Location Appendix A No x Turn the large MFD knob to move the cursor horizontally Turn the small MFD knob to move the cursor vertically Appendix B Index UO Press the small MFD knob again to cancel panning The display will return to the previous map view nd oco Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 Selecting Items on the Map When the target pointer is placed on an object the name of that object is highlighted even if the name wasnt originally displayed on the map This feature applies to airports NAVAIDs user created waypoints roads lakes rivers just about everything displayed on the map except route lines When _ an airport NAVAID or user waypoint is selected on the map display you can review information about the item 1 While viewing the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press the small MFD knob to activate panning 38 2 Move the cursor with the small and large MFD knobs to highlight a feature 2 Press ENT to display information about the highlighted feature 3 Press the INFO soft key if available to view more information about the highlighted feature 4 Press the WX soft key if available to view TAF and METAR information 5 Press t
246. le 3 Style 4 leSsO D 8 29 Figure 3 71 Wind Vector Style 3 When a Wind Vector style is selected a Wind Vector box with the chosen style will be displayed to the left of the HSI on the PFD When OFF is selected the Wind Vector box will not be displayed y xipueddy Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 53 A 3 4 1 4 PFD Options Nav Status E When selected Nav Status information is displayed on the PFD either on the top of the display Style 1 or to the left of the HSI Style 2 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small E MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired Nav Status value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT PFD OPTIONS WIND VECTOR NAY STATUS SYNCHRONIZATI CDI WPT z Style 1 Top of Display Style 2 Left of HSI ges Figure 3 71 Nav Status Style lt 3 After the Nav Status style is selected the chosen style will be displayed on the PFD 5 E A NOTE Nav Status option is not available for all installations 3 54 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 1 5 Synchronization Dual Installations Only Dual GDU 620 units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to communicate and share information by Crossfilling or synchronizing information between the two units When Barometric Correction is synchronized an
247. lected Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Saturation value Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Saturation value System Sec 1 BRIGHTNESS Sec 2 PFD CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 87 External Video Saturation Adjustment 3 After selecting the desired setting press the small MFD knob to exit editing v 3 4 5 5 X Restore Defaults The Restore Defaults selection will return the Brightness Contrast and Saturation values to their original settings D 2 XE N O On T gt a 1 While viewing the External Video page press the MENU key OPTIONS E lt Press the HFD knab to return to bose poga Figure 3 88 Restore Video Defaults Menu Selection 2 Restore Defaults will be highlighted Press the ENT key lt 16 A Appendix B Index 3 66 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 4 6 X Position Reporting optional Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits them over the Iridium satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56 3 4 6 1 Status The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the status of the reporting system NOTE The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after power up of the GDU As a result for that period the product info for the GSR 56 will show Waiting Time Until Transmit The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the
248. lected display range System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending TAS unit has failed unit is self reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data Data is not being received trom the TAS unit Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page Shown in center of Traffic Map Page Table 4 15 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations pJezey Y 29 gt z oO e T E e a gt 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 3 GARMIN 4 7 5 Traffic Pop Up 5 When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page other than the NAV Traffic 5 page and a traffic alert becomes active the Traffic Warning pop up will be displayed z NOTE The traffic pop up will not appear when your aircraft is on the OR ground Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page a OR Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page 5E o m lt Sec 5 Additional Features EUW EITIC MW ON i jaa ae Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Traffic Pop Up Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Figure 4 29 Traffic Pop Up Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 38 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 8 TIS Traffic Optional WARNING The Traffic Information Service TIS is intended for advisory use only TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually It i
249. lid structures will be detected by the weather radar The weather radar will not detect clouds thunderstorms or turbulence directly It detects precipitation associated with clouds thunderstorms and turbulence The best radar signal 35 7 reflectors are raindrops wet snow or wet hail The larger the raindrop the better it reflects The size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity Because large drops in a small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm the radar displays the storm as a strong return Ice dry snow and dry hail have low reflective levels and often will not be displayed by the radar A cloud that contains only small raindrops such as fog or drizzle will not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return Wet Most ao Hail Reflective AYR Least i Dry Reflective Figure 4 69 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 83 gt zZ T EI e rar Nuaddv XI M UIdd V JaC 2UN A GARMIN 4 10 2 2 Ground Returns The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the ground target Angle of Incidence and the reflective properties of that target The gain can be adjusted so shorelines rivers lakes _ and cities are well defined Increasing gain too much causes the display to fill in between targets
250. lock your Sirius XM Satellite Radio subscription activation This is only used for the initial subscription or to make a change NOTE Refer to the GDL 69 69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190 00355 04 Rev G or later for further information 5 24 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 5 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment Radio Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A The GDU 620 serves as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 694A Sirius XM Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signal from satellites coverage far exceeds land based transmissions When enabled the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux page group The information on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of four areas the Active Channel Available Channels Category of the highlighted channel and the Volume setting The Active Channel window shows the Channel Name and Number Artist Song Title and Category 1 Turn the large MFD knob to Aux Mode 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page Active Channel Window Tl t te e a gt n euonippy G 295 Available Channel Window Channel Scroll Bar Selected C
251. lot flies outside the deviation band beyond 200 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude _ changes to yellow text on a black background flashes for five seconds and an aural tone is generated g Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of 200 ft 4000 4000 HETTMN Figure 2 21 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations E NOTE The aural tone when approaching the selected altitude may be 3 E configured at installation for either 200 feet or 1000 feet The tone when deviating from the selected altitude always occurs at 200 feet 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 13 A GARMIN 2 4 3 Changing Barometric Setting gt The Barometric Setting affects the altitude values shown on the PFD Barometric pressure units may be displayed as either inches in or hectopascals hpa See System Display Units in Section 3 for more detail _ Press the BARO key to activate Baro mode X 2 Turn the PFD knob to increase or decrease the altimeter setting OR PFD Knob Selected Baro Setting shown Baro Setting in Altimeter window Figure 2 22 Barometric Setting u 3 Press the PFD knob while in Baro mode to toggle between Standard Pressure 29 92 in and the currently selected barometric setting 2322 4 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height p Alerting By For altitude awareness a Minimum Descent Altitude MDA alert can be D displayed on the PFD The values are set i
252. m the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced saunjea4 euonippy G 299 unuuv 9 299 S sioqui S L 2998 Alesso 5 8 29S 4 10 3 2 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level MPEL Other 3 Radars See the appropriate documentation for MPEL i I 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 85 Sec4 5 D 2 N S oe lt A GARMIN MPEL P Boundary p Tu 11 for 12 antenna ES ls mS Figure 4 71 MPEL Boundary 4 10 4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations It is not to be considered an all encompassing Setup that will work in all situations but this method does provide good overall Y 2 parameters for the monitoring of threats Ultimately it is desired to have the 7 antenna tilted so that the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel _ with the ground The following discussion explains one way of achieving this With the aircraft flying level adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals the aircrafts current altitude AGL divided _ by 1 000 For example if the aircraft is at 14 000 feet adjust the tilt so the front z edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 NM Note this antenna tilt angle setting Now raise the antenna tilt 6 above this setting The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4
253. m Unit may operate at extreme oe temperatures Extended operation at high temperatures e is not recommended br as damage to the GDU may occur 2 PFD MFD coloration may be incorrect Backlight may dim to reduce power and heat e GAD 43 e Contact your Garmin dealer for communication lost service ur e Gyro Emulation Type e Contact your Garmin dealer for Mismatch Fault service T e Yaw Rate Scale e Contact your Garmin dealer for A Factor Mismatch service Fault x e GDU AHRS Monitor Contact your Garmin dealer for z Fault service e Pitch Deviation Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for service e Roll Deviation Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for service 6 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action e Yaw Rate Deviation e Contact your Garmin dealer for Fault service z e AHRS A429 Attitude Contact your Garmin dealer for Time out Fault service Dy e AHRS A429 Attitude Contact your Garmin dealer for Invalid Fault service e AHRS Pitch Out of Contact your Garmin dealer for Range Fault service e AHRS Attitude Invalid e Contact your Garmin dealer for Fault service 7 e AHRS A429 Heading Contact your Garmin dealer for Time out Fault service e AHRS A429 Heading Contact your Garmin dealer for EE Invalid Fault service A e Power Supply Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for Service e AC Reference Lost
254. mall MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon PHONEBOOK Phone Book icon HAME When Highlighted PHONE NUMBER turn small MFD knob to view list Figure 3 102 Selecting the Phone Book Catalog 2 Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the desired entry PHONEBOOK HE PHONE NUMBER Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry Figure 3 103 Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry 3 74 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor Deleting a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon 2 Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the desired entry Press ENT to select the catalog entry 3 Tum the large MFD knob to highlight the DELETE key Press ENT to delete the 5 catalog entry Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 2 Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the desired entry Press ENT to select the catalog entry a Editing a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon 3 Use the large MF
255. mbols A Non threat Advisory shown as an open white diamond indicates that an o zZ e T E e rar intruding aircraft is at greater than 1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond five NM A Traffic Advisory TA alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria A Traffic gt J Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA 3 symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic pJezey is moving to the nearest 45 Traffic information for which TIS is unable to gt determine the bearing non bearing traffic is displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the lt Traffic Map Page on which traffic can be displayed The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft the altitude separation appears above the traffic symbol if below the altitude separation appears below Altitude trend is displayed as an up down arrow for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction to the right of the target symbol Traffic symbols for aircraft T without altitude reporting capability
256. meter documentation for the appropriate value RA TEST oS Figure 2 46 Radar Altimeter Test Annunciation 3 Press the RA TEST key again to stop the self test Foreword No x System U CD WY 4 Ifthe unit fails the self test the RA value will not match the expected value The RA FAIL annunciation will appear on the PFD when the GDU is not receiving any Radar Altimeter data RA FAIL is not related to the self test Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Figure 2 47 Radar Altimeter Failure Annunciation 2 10 Fast Slow Indication Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts The Fast Slow indication as provided from an external system is shown on the left side of the PFD along the horizon line See your AFM for details on operation Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Pointer Fast Slow Scale Appendix A Appendix B Index Figure 2 48 Fast Slow Scale and Pointer 2 32 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2 11 PFD Display Units The PFD display units may be set to standard or metric units by the installer The MFD display units may still be selected by the user in the System Setup page of Aux mode DJOM9JOJ 299 cn lt NY cr D 3 DULpIONY JN piezeH c 29g G 286 y 28S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv y xipueddy ieSso D S OQWAS Suelv 8 9 28g L 988 unuuy 9 29S X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 33 GARMIN plomaio4 U
257. min G600 Pilot s Guide 4 117 A GARMIN Data Link Lightning Data Viewing Range The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Lightning will not be shown In the figure above where 300 NM is selected GFDS data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and lower 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the R MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to ge highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight DL LING Data Viewing Range Se 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted PFD Sec4 m N e lt Sec 5 Divi Ge DL LING Osto Wining Range A Car 3eco Figure 4 112 GFDS Lightning Viewing Range Selection CO x 3 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option pe A OX A mnanr Appenc NAAA ALIN Appendix 4 118 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 11 10 SIGMETs and AIRMETS SIG AIR SIGMETs SIGnificant METeorological Information and AIRMETs AIRmen s METeorological Information are broadcast for potenti
258. n the Active Flight Plan page or from the Charts page menu When active the minimum descent altitude setting is displayed in the minimums window at the bottom lett of the Altitude Tape when you are within 2500 feet of the selected altitude A NOTE The Altitude Minimums Alerting Bug appears parked at the bottom of the altitude tape as soon as a value is set in the minimums alerter The bug will unpark and start to move up the tape as soon as the altitude is within the range of the tape The bug is reset when power is cycled The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA DH 28 e When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the selected altitude setting the Minimums box appears with the altitude value in cyan text Once in range the Altitude Minimums Bug appears in cyan on the altitude tape e When the aircraft is within 100 feet of the selected altitude setting the bug and text turn white e Once the aircraft reaches the selected altitude minimums setting the bug and i the altitude text turn yellow and the aural alert Minimums minimums is heard one time The text remains in yellow until the aircraft altitude is more 2 14 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN than 50 feet above the set altitude minimum value Yellow When Cyan Within 2500 ft White Within 100 ft zT E cu gag M DJOM9JOJ 29 Barometric Minimums Bug Barometric es
259. nal The airport directory database contains airport facility and FBO information This database is optional and N A will be displayed in white text on the startup screen if the database is not installed This database may be available in multiple versions with varying update cycles and or content Since these databases are not stored internally in the GDU 620 a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in each display unit for dual installations After subscribing to the desired database product A 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN the database product will need to be downloaded to a Supplemental Data Card Insert the Supplemental Data Card into the card slot shown in Figure A 4 The upper slot is typically used for updating the navigation database and is then normally left open The card may be inserted in either slot The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to update the databases stored on the card Navigation Database SD Update Card Terrain Obstacles Airports SafeTaxi Charts FliteChart or ChartView Database SD Card Figure A 4 SD Card Database Location The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions detailed in the Navigation Databases section of the Garmin web site fly garmin com Once the updated files have been downloaded from the web site a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program
260. nd Holding the VS Key to Engage Disengage VS mode f 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 35 eS C 298 unuv EEO 9 29 285 ca D C co g xipueddy Sec 4 Hazard Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 c 5 c lt Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A GARMIN 5 6 7 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Some autopilots support mode annunciations located at the top of the PFD Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for details on the autopilot mode annunciations Foreword When autopilot annunciations are displayed at the top of the PFD the Nav Status information will be located to the left of the HSI NAV STATUS Style 2 System Roll Modes Autopilot Status Pitch Modes PFD Active Mode TTET pisz E Active Mode Armed Mode ER A ADF Armed Mode Figure 5 35 Autopilot Annunciations on Top of PFD MFD Avoidance Nn w gt 19 lt P LL Appendix A Index 5 36 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 7 Synthetic Vision Technology Optional SVT The optional Synthetic Vision Technology SVI is a visual enhancement E to the G600 SVT is displayed as a forward looking display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft SVT information is shown on the primary flight display PFD The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitu
261. ndicator on the PFD flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area s To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft l the Traffic voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs increases For example when the first TA is displayed a voice and visual annunciation are generated As long as a single TA remains on the display no additional voice alerts are generated If a second TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases another voice alert is generated a I S r A Traffic Not Available TNA voice alert is generated when the TIS service ME becomes unavailable or is out of range Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following e Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service o s Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS capable Mode S radar site Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage In flat terrain the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles Terrain and 2 obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all directions Traffic does not have an operating transponder 4 44 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Re
262. nformation will not be shown In the example below where 3 NM is selected the SafeTaxi information will be shown at map ranges of 3 NM and lower rE TAKI VIEWING RANDE lis Figure 3 52 Navigation Map Safe Taxi Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SafeTaxi Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 37 T o D pJOM UJ91s g 29S ddd C 298 adi 99 DULpIOAY piezeH t 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv KleSso o sioquu S SHa V 8 9 28g aS unuuy 9 298 G 29 y xipuaddy X PU g xipueddy A GARMIN Runway Extension Range The Runway Extension Range option selects the whether Runway Extensions is shown for the destination airport runway Runway Extensions will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected Runway Extensions will not be shown o D pe O LL ET Aelmtioan RNWY EXTENSION RANGE Mii DA g ni i TARY 485 Figure 3 53 Navigation Map Runway Extension Selection 21 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group
263. ng installation When power is cycled the values you set will be reset MD E A NOTE When power is cycled the Airspeed Reference values are reset During preflight the Airspeed Reference values should be checked and set appropriately for the current aircraft configuration and performance Xt AIRSPEEDS PFD Figure 3 70 Airspeed References shown on PFD when activated 3 52 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired Airspeeds value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the value and press ENT 3 The On Off setting will now be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off and press ENT The next value will be highlighted DJOM9JOJ La HR TA 3 4 1 3 PFD Options Wind Vector When selected wind vector information is displayed on the PFD to the left of the HSI Four styles are available 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired Wind Vector value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT I SET D O N c S 2 A d D PFD OPTIONS WIND VECTOR G 29 SoJn eo euonippy SYNCHRONIZATI SHV 8 unuuy 9 IPS sioquJ S LS Style 1 Style 2 Sty
264. notches Doughnut shapes These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes nor are tornado returns limited to these characteristics Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a normal thunderstorm display 4 10 5 4 Hail Hail results from updratts carrying water high enough to freeze Therefore the higher the top of a thunderstorm the greater the probability that it contains hail Vertically scanning the target return can give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar It is not the actual top or true top of the storm The actual top of a storm cell is seen With the eyes in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top The actual z top does not indicate the top of the hazardous area Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection _ It can have a film of water on its surface making its reflective characteristics z 5 similar to a very large water droplet Because of this film of water and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets thunderstorms with large lt amounts of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain Some hail shafts are extremely narrow 100 yards or less and make poor radar targets In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry no liquid coating target returns are less intense Hail s
265. nother option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 47 zA o plomal 29S Wass ddd C 298 eDUEpIOAV piezeH SoJn ea jeuonippy y xipueddy Alesso 5 SJOQUIAS SHa V 8 2 29g 28g unuuv G 99S Xepul g xipueddy adi 99 y 29 9 298 A GARMIN Airways The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the Navigation Map All Low only and Hi only Airways may be selected When Off is selected airways will not be shown Foreword NAVIGATION MAP 2 SETUP Sec 1 System Sec 2 PFD OD E A Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Features Sec 5 Additional Figure 3 63 Airways Selection Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Airways option Sec 7 Symbols li Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary m Appendix B Index 3 48 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 3 11 Split Screen Optional External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an externally mounted video source on the aircraft 1 While viewing the Map function
266. o D Se MD SoJN eo4 G 28S jeuonippv LOTKE O08 NE S y 8 unuuv ima NECIP gt Eos 9 cione Scroll Bars L1 T a et ei tar zat pt CHE wis Wd ohio Tt SJOQWAS AlesSO S 9 9S Figure 3 124 Chart Scroll Bars Charts y xipueddy Xapu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 89 A GARMIN 3 5 3 2 Selecting a New Chart by Airport A chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for 2 the desired airport Figure 3 125 Airport Identifier Selection 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft key to change the airport 3 2 Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character 3 Use the small MFD knob to change the character 24 Press ENT to accept the selected airport 5 Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the desired chart 6 Press ENT to display the desired chart 7 With ChartView only and when available for the selected chart more detail is available Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart Press the Header Plan Profile or Minimums keys to view detailed sections for the chart for those topics 3 90 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 5 3 3 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT You may select other charts to display based on your flight plan FPL charts of the nearest airport NRST
267. o highlight Off or Automatic and then press the ENT key The Position Reporting Period interval will now be selected a 5 Turn the small MFD knob to select the reporting frequency POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIHE UNTIL TRANSHIT mr EP ER S SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 91 Select Standard Reporting Period Frequency ae 6 Press the small MFD knob to exit editing A 7 With the Standard Reporting Type the reporting period may be manually overridden by pressing the SEND soft key to send data POSITION REPORTING SEND Soft Key Label SEND SEND Soft Key Figure 3 92 Press SEND to Override the Reporting Period 3 68 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Automatic Flight Following AFF The G600 system when combined with a GSR 56 Iridium datalink can send 5 position reports that contain data as required by the U S Government Automated 5 Flight Following system The GSR 56 account will allow configuration to forward data to the Automated Flight Following system 1 While viewing the Position Reporting function press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight AFF and then press the ENT POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD ever Figure 3 93 Select Automatic Flight Following AFF Reporting Type 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select OFF or the default Every 2 Min
268. ob to the next option z Terrain Scale The Terrain Scale option selects whether the Terrain Scale is shown on the Navigation Map The Terrain scale will be located on the right side of the display TERRAIM OD a A 16HFT BBBrT Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Figure 3 33 Navigation Map Terrain Scale 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Terrain Scale option Sec 5 Additional Features NAVIGATION HAP 1 S Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts TOGN Oni Dn OFF On Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE OBSTACLE VIEWING RANGE LAT LON VIEWING RANGE Appendix A Appendix B Index Figure 3 34 Navigation Map Terrain Scale Selection 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off 3 24 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Obstacle Data Viewing Range The Obstacle Data Viewing Range option selects whether the Obstacle Data is shown on the Navigation Map Obstacles will be shown at and below the selected map range Map ranges above this value will not show the Obstacle Data In
269. of date or not available The Power up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the SafeTaxi Expires date is shown in white When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired the SafeTaxi Expires date appears in yellow The message SafeTaxi N A appears in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card Sec 6 Annun Sec 8 Sec 7 Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 5 20 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN DATABASE TENTI 2 a ri 2 j B Bosemop Lond 2 00 v Basemap Lond 2 B 3 SofeTaxi Expires 5 JUL 2007 z A erraim 204 am Terran euid Airport Terrain 2 04 y Airport Terrain 2 04 Bj Chart Data N GCG prOgyvide T i i i o var All mas ond terroin data provided is only to be ix used cs o gennrnl reference to your surrounding und as on nid bo zituctinnnl qworenres SafeTaxi Database is Current SafeTaxi Database has Expired DATABASE E Basemap Land 2 00 To SafeTaxi N A D D ae arrun 2 84 Airport Terrain 2 84 go All nar and terrain dale provided 5 a io bo 7 ised ms 0 EI uEPI Pea eee TT UU EINER LE IS Two on oid to HEISE IT NR SafeTaxi Database Not Available 3 f O N Figure 5 17 Power up Page SafeTaxi Database The SafeTaxi Region Version Cycle Effective date and Expires date of the a database cycle can also be found on the AUX System Status page SafeTaxi information appears in white and yellow text The EFFECTIVE date appear
270. oft Altitude HUON nNnun me Figure 4 121 Winds Aloft Altitude Selection 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Altitude Viewing Range 3 Tum the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept z3 the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to zz the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 126 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 ADDITIONAL FEATURES OPTIONAL A NOTE The availability of SafeTaxi ChartView or FliteCharts in electronic z form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the aircraft See the AFMS for more information O NOTE ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a 3 Garmin dealer Additional features of the GDU 620 include the following ChartView and FliteCharts electronic charts e SafeTaxi diagrams e Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment e XM WX Satellite Weather covered in Section 4 7 e Traffic covered in Sections 4 5 and 4 6 e Synthetic Vision Technology SVI The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on board electronic terminal procedures charts Electronic charts offer the con
271. on Indicator Hertz Initial Approach Fix International Civil Aviation Organization Instrument Flight Rules International Geomagnetic Reference Field Instrument Landing System Instrument Meteorological Conditions Imminent Obstacle Impact information inches of mercury intersection s integrity RAIM unavailable Imminent Terrain Impact left lett runway latitude Liquid Crystal Display local Light Emitting Diode The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints Low Instrument Flight Rules Lateral Navigation localizer loss of integrity GPS longitude Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance Line Replacement Unit left lightning Magnetic Magnetic Variation A proprietary data format used to forward navigation information from the GNS units to the GDU 620 maximum maximum speed overspeed Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN MDA barometric minimum descent altitude METAR Aviation Routine Weather Report z MFD Multi Function Display E MIN minimum E Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the aircraft present position Do MKR marker beacon MOA Military Operations Area MOV movement mpm meters per minute zd MSA Minimum Safe Altitude TUN MSG message MSL Mean Sea Level s MT meter E mV millivolt s MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules E NAV navigation NAVAID NAVigation AID d NCR Negative Climb Rate EA NDB Non Directional Beacon
272. one Book s 3723 3473 Phone VOLUME sscroisnssinins nios 3 75 3 4 7 4 Making a Phone Call s r 3 76 3475 Answering S Phone C Ollsosenotaticum nti ucirtuti toute tet vote 3 77 _s 3 5 Flight Plan Pages ssssssseeentnn 3 78 Fa 2 51 Active Flight Plan Page ctiecnorts eiusmo irme tourist rona Ete edt Dieu 3 78 7 3 5 1 1 Active Flight Plan DO al lidaciaensacescnedateisscsdcetdonddtelasetaceiiensedets 3 79 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide IX TO gt lt 3 LL 4 x 4 2 4 4 A GARMIN 3 5 1 2 Active Flight Plan ODMONS secas seusisate eus bue pete ne sa ge eus eepuiento 3 79 3 5 1 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 3 80 SUE Waypoint Information Page sseee 3 81 3 5 2 1 Selecting a Waypoint sesseeeennnnes 3 82 3 5 2 2 Waypoint Information Detail 3 83 SN M Alrport Deui ER 3 86 3 5 2 4 Waypoint Weather Information Optional 3 87 2 503 Charts Page Optional m 3 88 Dames Viewing Cia Sct ceecccstaausaccracesaceteeueadctaueiacetecoeadeteceiacstacusetots 3 89 3 5 3 2 Selecting a New Chart by Airport 3 90 3 5 3 3 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT 3 91 3 5 3 4 Change Day Night View eee 3 91 Hazard AVOID ANGG oscar OD Oddo IDE DEDI EIN 4 1 Terrain Configurations esses 4 1 EE E EE E LOT 4 3 TSWANA OVMIDMILY T
273. onippy Mes Orientation Track up NERAD Gute Virwing Ronan UFF HERD Lesend Echo Tow Duto Viewhna Rmse Cloud Ton Dota Viewine Renee Lightning Dota Viewing Amge Call Hov Onta Viewing Ronen BIB AIR awlas Raiga SUelv 8 unuuy 9 29S S OQUWAS L 2998 NGC CRIT NEL Surfoce Dota Viewing Range C Surfocs Duta Timm 7 R Fre Lui Dutu Viewing Rue en Winds Aloft Dato Vimelna Ranae Winds Alaft Altitude County Duta Viewing Ramse 3 Creione Duin Viewing Range E g Sf Figure 4 57 Surface data Viewing Range Selection a 2 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 11 Sec4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 A GARMIN While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor tlashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Foreword No x Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Surface Data Viewing Range value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted UO Sec 1 System m Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 2 PFD Surface Data Time The Surface Data Time option allows you to select the forecast time when the Surface and City Forecast weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pag
274. ons are whether the databases are not configured not available current out of date or disabled See the table below for the various FliteCharts Powcrup page displays and the definition of each ua w gt a gt eB LL c S 5 lt 5 16 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Power up Page Display Definition Blank Line G600 system is not contigured for FliteCharts Contact a Garmin authorized service center for configuration me SS System is configured for dni Chart Data N A T vilia s FliteCharts but no chart database is installed Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix A for the FliteCharts database EZ ri l Normal operation pi FliteChurts la CATA Eita Charts database is valid and within current cycle FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date but still within the 180 day viewing period FliteCharts database has timed out Database is beyond 180 days after expiration date FliteCharts database is no longer available for viewing plomalo4 ule1s g dd 2 HIN 295 ZeH S 92UPepIOAV DIEZE iv Jeuonippy mu a gt te e a gt n SHON 8 unuuv 9 sioqui g Table 5 2 FliteCharts Power up Page Annunciations and Definitions AJeSSO 9 9S y xipuaddy X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 17 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3
275. or 3 When Off is selected Cloud Tops will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selected Cloud Top data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower System U WM WY DATA LINK SETUP Hor Oriewtetion NEXRAD Dutu Viewing Ranae NEXRAD Leonid Echo Tos Date Vinwing Ranga Cloud Tee Dota Viewing Range Lighting Dukn Vinwing Rongn Coll Mev Deta Winving Ronan SIG AIR Viewing Ronse METAR Duti Viewing Ronse Surfoce Deto Viewing Rongi Surfers Dato Time Fre Lv Data Viewing Range Figure 4 43 Cloud Top Viewing Range Selection Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD S ce co N UO a 4 lt L Features While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Cloud Top Data Viewing Range value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Annun amp Alerts No x Sec 7 Symbols 2 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 4 62 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 9 11 XM WX Satellite Lightning Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud to groun
276. or details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Charts page refer to Section 5 Additional Features Charts Menu Selections System NOTE If you highlight the minimums Altitude field and hit the CLR key it will turn the minimums alerting functionality off MFD amp Alerts Features Symbols Appendix A Index 2 16 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 25 Vertical Speed V S Indicator Vertical speed data is presented on the bottom right of the PFD A Vertical Speed bug and a bug setting are also available Vertical Speed Bug Current Vertical Speed Vertical Speed Bug Setting Figure 2 25 Vertical Speed V S Tape and Window JAIN ddd E 298 l 99S The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non S T moving tape The tape can be scaled at 2000 3000 or 4000 fpm as set by the installer Major gradations are every 1000 fpm and minor gradations every 500 fpm The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 3 S v fpm If the rate of ascent descent exceeds the vertical speed displayed on the tape the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate s appears inside the pointer The Vertical Speed Indicator range determines the airspeed tape range VSI set by installer Airspeed Tape Range E x Table 2 1 Ver
277. ough a list of available options a scroll bar always appears to the right of the window box when the option list is longer than the window box Appendix A 23 Press the ENT key to select the desired option 4 Press the CLR key or MFD knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation 1 18 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN No Options Available Options for MAP Window PEE MERG m O T D O s G Prea fhe APD keb fo mtra Nn Bir Pree the ARO ied to reter n mar Ot Figure 1 21 Page Menu Examples 92UPepIOAV JN ddd pJezeH aS Z aS G 29g y 239 SoJn eo euonippv sue v unuuy 9 298 sioquJ S LS AJeSSO S 8 29S I T3 GS D 5 2 ES I I Oo s c gt x 2 ES Og 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 19 GARMIN 1 4 4 System Settings G600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page The following settings can be changed Display Brightness Mode and Level Airspeed References Glide REE V V V1 and V V2 PFD Options Wind Vector and Nav Status Dual Unit Synchronization CDI and Baro Dual installations only Date Time Date Time Time Format and Time Offset MFD Display Units Distance Speed and Altitude Vertical Speed e System Display Units Navigation Angle Reference Pressure Units and Temperature Units DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS DATE TIRE LEVEL ff DATE W1
278. ow TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Sec 4 5 o 2 No lt Figure 4 81 Highlight Gain Cal Value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain Cal value Press the MFD knob again to accept the value and end editing TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 82 Adjust Gain Cal Value Restore Calibrated Gain 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU key 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Restore Calibrated Gain and press ENT 4 96 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Press He AFD inet to reira ba bene poge Figure 4 83 Restore Calibrated Gain OR 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key 2 Press the GAIN CAL soft key to restore the calibrated gain value Press the MFD knob again to accept the value and end editing 4 10 6 5 Sector Scan GWX Radars Only Adjusting the Sector Scan reduces the scan angle from Full in increments of 20 40 and 60 in horizontal scanning Sector scanning is not available for vertical scanning lOAY a re a 1 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the E CONTROL soft key 2 Press the BRG soft key to display the Bearing Line 3 Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position The location of the Bearing Line will become the center point of the Sector Scan 4
279. ow indicator DME field Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Figure 2 16 Extreme Pitch Indication Appendix B Index 2 10 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F Figure 2 17 Extreme Pitch Indication Figure 2 18 Extreme Pitch Indication Nose Down Nose Up 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 11 y xipueddy Alesso 5 S OQWAS sue v 3 soinjee4 QUCPIOAY QJIN Wass plomalo4 99 PUOILIPPY7 2998 Xapul g xipueddy 29 piezeH Y 225 uhuuv 9 29 8 29S G 298 A GARMIN 2 4 Altimeter The altimeter displays the current altitude altitude trend altitude bug setting altitude bug and the current BARO setting Foreword The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line extending up or down on the left side of the Altitude scale The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted altitude in six seconds if the current vertical speed is maintained Sec 1 System The Altitude Bug is displayed at the selected Altitude Bug setting A portion of the Altitude Bug will be displayed at the top or the bottom of the altitude tape if the selected Altitude Bug is off of the tape N vA o Qo e When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed the altitude received from the radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD See the Radar Altimeter section for more details 2 4 1 Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter Sec 3 MFD 2 1 Press the ALT key to activate Altitude mode _
280. own at map ranges of 500 NM and lower TFRs E R and METARs are the only weather products shown below 10 NM ME NORTH UP NT V PRECIP d X3 MAIN Boundary Of Selected Viewing Range piezep 7 29 gt z fo T EI e rar Area Of No Coverage 3g Coverage Boundary P TAROLINA HE o PIE WEATHER HAP 2 LEGEND TSDR Figure 4 106 GFDS PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend S 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to ta highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 27 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Data Viewing Range Turn the gt small MFD knob to highlight the desired value 8 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 113 3eco L CO OC cT OOD A GARMIN 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted PRECIP Deti Viewing Forno Figure 4 107 GFDS PRECIP Viewing Range Selection 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 14 11 7 PRECIP Legend The PRECIP Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the PRECIP legend in the top right region of the MFD The full legend a YW S lt z is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key l A PRECIP Legend Figure 4 108
281. p Page Menu With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired option Figure 3 16 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Map Orientation The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Navigation Map ORIEHMTATIGON LER nM AISLE UL zi A imos LE ea De Le nou BEIT aF Po eta Ll e ADTO zo ta etter prp esM pai n TIU nF n ha hag ree i1 ed ur wget dT YE IMS jn O TTE Figure 3 17 Navigation Map Orientation 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 13 T O plOMal 28S UJa1s g ddd C 298 adi 99 DULpIOAY piezeH Y 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv Hesso D sioquu S SHa V 8 99S aS unuuy 9 298 G 29 y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy A GARMIN North Up At The North Up At option allows you to select the map range where at and above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North Up For example with the 500 NM value selected in the figure below when the map range of the MFD is 500 NM or more the map orientation will automatically become North Up Foreword Sec System 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1
282. p the setup page Field of View 3 Turn the large MFD knob to scroll through the options to FIELD OF VIEW 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off Press the ENT key to confirm your selection 5 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page 190 00601 02 Rev F HAVIGATION HAF 1 SETUF ORIENTATION NORTH UP AT AUTO 2007 LO DATA TRACK VECTOR LENGTH WIND VECTOR HAV RANGE RING TOPO DATA TOPO SCALE TERRAIN DATA TERRAIN SCALE DESTACLE VIEWING RANGE LAT LON VIEWING RANGE FIELD OF VIEW cee n Press the HFD knob to return to bose pogo Figure 5 51 Map Setup Items Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide plomao4 C cK UJ91SAS ds ddd 298 S2UPpIOAV S9 v 9 Uunuuv leSso D sioquu S y xipuaddy X9pu g xipueddy zer pJe AN D Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 x lt lt Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A GARMIN 5 7 3 9 Unusual Attitudes Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display pointing to the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude condition The display shows either a brown or blue band of color at the top or bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme pitch attitudes Foreword System Two conditions that inhibit SVT and generate alerts on the PFD The pos
283. play Level Brightness value Turn the small MFD knob to change the value and then the ENT key to save the selected value 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 91 GARMIN plomalo4 Wass 99S ddd C 298 ad 99 e2UepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S This page intentionally left blank S9Jn e9J euonippy G IVS spUelv 8 uhuuy 9 29 sioquJ S 29 Alesso 5 8 29 y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 92 A GARMIN 4 HAZARD AVOIDANCE The G600 hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory information of potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather terrain and air traffic This section is divided into the following groups Terrain Avoidance Terrain Proximity e TAWS B Optional Terrain SVI Optional Traffic Avoidance e Traffic Advisory System Optional e Traffic Information Service TIS Optional GTX 33 330 Transponder required Weather GDL 69 69A XM Satellite Weather Optional Weather Radar Optional HE GFDS Weather with the Iridium satellite system through GSR 56 Optional 4 1 Terrain Configurations The following terrain awareness configurations are available in the G600 system gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 e TAWS B A system developed to meet the terrain alerting and ground B proximity requirements for Class B TAWS systems as de
284. press ENT EH 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight METAR Data Viewing Range z 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept 5 the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 2 R 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option gt 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 123 A GARMIN 4 11 12 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface 5 and at selected altitudes Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL Pressing the WIND DOWN or WIND UP soft keys steps down or up in 3 000 foot increments Product Age Selected Altitude Present Position Sec4 5 te No E r Winds Aloft Symbol Winds Aloft Altitude Soft Keys Figure 4 118 GFDS S Weather Winds Aloft WINDS ALOFT O KNOTS 5 KNOTS OR LESS 10 KNOTS OR LESS 50 KNOTS OR LESS Figure 4 119 GFDS Weather Winds Aloft Legend 4 124 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Winds Aloft will not be shown In the figure below where 150 NM is selec
285. press the small MFD knob to cancel selection 5 26 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 5 3 2 Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected category Active Channel Number Artist Name Category Active Channel Name Song Title New Selected Channel mul t fa e fa n Jeuonippy 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired channel 2 Press ENT to make the highlighted channel the Active Channel NOTE A delay of several seconds may occur when selecting a channel The listed title may end before the radio begins playing the current Active Channel material 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing OR 4 Press CHNL and then the CH or CH soft keys to increment up or down one channel at a time in the active category OR 5 Press CHNL and then the DIR CH soft key to directly select a channel in the active category Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel 6 Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel selection 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 2 A GARMIN 5 5 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level as well as mute z the audio so
286. ptional susce cn ttn sinet atris 34A A Node POS cautes mde ER ERR DON SEEFDE DNI HERE este UR PEERS 3 4 1 System Settings e 34 1 1 Display BGI OSS wr cecacn dees cee tcu eo EH EO creo sieri EENEN 3 4 1 2 Airspeed Reference Marks ssseeeenee 3 4 13 PFD Options Wind VeCtOI ss sciesccent icti taa rir ees Rhodes 3 4 1 4 PFD Options Nav Status s eestecseoentoctic tete neo o RUE e Epub cor er ttt ote 4 39 3 4 1 5 Synchronization Dual Installations Only 3 55 S NECEM Dicono cc c 99 uc 3 4 4 7 MED Display Units 3 58 X 24 18 System Display UnItS aceesccemeeattminte dtu iu teh Dan Eten eaae oe Ebo cds 3 595 3 4 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information Optional 3 60 3 4 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment Radio Optional 3 61 3 4 4 uii 36282 3 4 5 External Video TOUS tuens kn vo HYS FERE HON DX FOR MEN 3 63 3 4 5 1 Select Video Source tenentes 3 DS eres 3 4 5 2 ZOOM iiis tetti 3 64 85 o 2 2 9 9 Rat hill esent ee eee ee ee ee DR pp DE eee 3 64 MU eoria Anoe o E E o E EE D E E a 3 04 a 3 4 5 5 Restore Defaults cccssscccsesssssesssssssssessessssssssssssssseseesseesen 3 66 3 3 4 6 Position Reporting Optional sss 3 67 S C m 3 07 340 REPON TYDE Tt 3 67 8 3 4 7 Iridium Phone Operation Optional 370 Sr MEE ri pm 3 7 0 3 4 7 2 Managing the Ph
287. ptions in mE 208 Cn Figure 3 49 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Group Selection dy 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Traffic Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Traffic options Xepul g xipued 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 35 A GARMIN Foreword Sec 1 System Figure 3 50 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Options Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Press ENT to accept the displayed value Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option QD c 2 lt Sec 4 Hazard 3 3 10 4 Aviation Feature Options The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of SafeTaxi information Runway Extensions Intersection NDB locations VOR locations and TFR icons on the Navigation Map Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Figure 3 51 Navigation Map Page Menu Aviation Group Selection Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 3 36 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN SafeTaxi Viewing Range The SateTaxi viewing range option selects whether SafeTaxi information is shown on the Navigation Map SafeTaxi will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected SafeTaxi i
288. r 2 18 2 20 Cursor 1 17 3 8 3 9 3 10 5 11 3 30 3 51 3 53 3 54 3 84 3 86 7 6 Customizing maps 3 11 Customizing Nav Map pages 3 11 Cycle number 5 11 5 16 5 20 Cyclone 4 50 4 51 7 5 D Database 1 4 1 13 3 12 3 62 4 4 4 9 4 25 4 68 4 70 4 122 5 10 5 16 5 20 6 7 6 10 A 1 A 4 Databases 1 10 Data fields 3 79 3 80 Data link 1 2 1 6 4 39 4 48 4 50 4 54 4 57 4 60 4 62 4 63 4 65 4 67 4 69 4 71 4 72 4 74 4 76 4 77 4 79 4 102 4 107 4 116 4 118 4 121 4 123 4 125 4 126 Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 5 30 Date 1 20 1 21 3 50 3 57 5 11 5 16 5 20 6 10 A 4 Day view 3 91 5 9 DCLTR soft key 3 1 3 6 5 18 5 19 Decision Height DH 3 78 Declutter 2 10 3 3 3 6 3 7 3 35 5 19 Departures 4 21 5 10 5 16 Display brightness 1 20 1 21 1 23 3 50 3 51 Display map 3 2 Display units 1 20 1 22 2 33 3 50 3 58 3 59 Distance 1 20 1 22 3 8 3 10 3 11 3 15 3 17 3 58 3 78 3 81 Distance measuring 3 10 DME 2 28 7 1 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Don t sink 4 19 4 24 DP 5 10 5 16 Dual installation 1 20 2 15 3 55 3 81 5 8 A 4 E Echo tops 4 51 4 55 4 59 4 60 4 61 7 5 ETA 3 78 Excessive descent rate alert 4 19 4 20 Expiration time 4 48 4 50 Exposure level 4 85 External TAWS 4 26 Extreme attitude 2 10 Extreme Pitch 2 10 5 48 Extreme Roll 2 11 F Facility 3 81 3 83 3 84 Fast Slow indication 2 32 Field of view 3
289. rar Fre Lul Dota Viewing Annan Winds Aloft Duta Vimeing Range Minds Aloft Altitude Eaunty Dulu Viewing Hamy Figure 4 47 Cell Movement Viewing Range Selection i i i Serfo Dota Time LS saunjeo euonippy G 29 SHV 9 unuuv 9 29 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Cell Movement Data Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted sioquJ S L 2998 Alesso 5 8 29S 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 2 I i 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 65 A GARMIN 4 9 13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIGMETs SIGnificant METeorological Information and AIRMETs 5 AlRmens METeorological Information are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft A Convective SIGMET is issued _ for hazardous convective weather A localized SIGMET is a significant weather 2 condition occurring at a localized geographical position When enabled SIGMET AIRMETS advise the pilot of potentially hazardous weather to all aircraft SIGMET AIRMET data covers icing tu
290. rbulence dust and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service The update rate is every 12 minutes INFORMATION grim FE ATRHET In TERES Tr LEA DNMJ AL FTTDP ARM ILE M DE AMO CST KA TI n Ti AA ORF T Sec4 S CE N o lt Press tho ENT toy to refuen to tho boos poge ALEXIS Figure 4 48 XM Weather AIRMETs When enabled the following AIRMETs are available for display e Icing e Turbulence e IFR conditions e Mountain obscuration e Surface winds 4 66 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range The SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value SIGMET AIRMET products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected SIGMET AIRMET will not be shown In the figure below where 300 NM is selected SIGMET AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of 300 NM and lower plomalo4 UJ91s g 298 DATA LINK SETUP ddd C 298 Hon Orinntotion UTI EE MEXRAD Dutu Viewing Rasse LFF NEXRAD Lind On Echo Tee Deto Vinuina Ranin T501NH Claud Top Duis Viewing Rame Off Lisbtains Data Viewing Rasse 3C Cell Hew Duta Vim ee SIG AIR Vicin Rengo Lar Dutn Viewing Rine Surfoce Deto Virwing Ronn Surface Deto Tien Fre Lvl Doto Viewing Ronee Winds Aloft Doto Viewing Ronge Winds Aloft Alb iin County Deto Wimans Ronen Cicl ae Doto Virw
291. repeating the process and selecting the XM Weather option 7 OPTIONS zi mpm peu LUN i IET In t I biti i Prass the MFD knob to return to bose poge Figure 4 92 Select XM Weather 4 11 1 GFDS Registration 4 11 1 1 Register With GFDS It is necessary to register the GDU with GFDS to utilize the weather products pJezey 7 29 gt z T EI e rar 1 Call Garmin Customer Service to create a GFDS account Provide the GDU System ID and airframe info model tail number etc 2 Customer Service will issue an access code to enter on the GFDS Registration page P 3 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 4 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Register With GFDS Press ENT 3 s the HFD knob to return to bose pie Figure 4 93 Select GFDS Registration 2 5 Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to the next position Highlight REGISTER and press ENT to complete the process The GDU will contact the GFDS servers using the GSR 56 transceiver If the access code and system ID are correct it will download and display the airtrame info 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 103 A GARMIN GARAIN FLIGST DATO Se DDE Fads mar DUM DARRIN FLIGHT Qoa GERMILE BEBIBIRSTIDM STATUS FEME EW b a LOLESS D a CURRENT REDISTRET ON DU LL ALI Mod GERD Ei 2
292. ric E Pressure Setting Heading Bug Select Vertical Course Select Speed Tape Altitude Bug Select Sg Vertical Speed Bug Select Bud 2d ao Barometric Setting Select Indicator Outside Air Temperature ai amp PED Knob SD Card Slots d Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Figure 2 1 PFD Description Ground Pointer Mode 2 Eun T FPL Desired Track T5 o eg Wpt Distance from Your Current Nav Present Position to Source Current FPL Leg Wpt Current Track SJOqW S L 2S WPT DIS DTK TRK Nav Status Style 1 Top of Display Em Nav Status Style 2 Left of HSI leSsO D 8 299 Figure 2 2 PFD Nav Status Bar Description A NOTE When navigating to a waypoint very far away the DTK CRS and TRK values displayed on the GDU 620 may differ from those displayed on the navigator however the CDI is correct and is the primary means of navigation This is because the GDU 620 applies magnetic variation corrections for the current aircraft location but some navigators apply magnetic variation correction for the waypoint location addy g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 1 A GARMIN 2 1 PFD Soft Keys GPS Source 1 SYN VIS t 22 SYN TERR A VOR ILS Source 2 ner APTSIGNS DME DME NAV 1 DME NAV 2 2 DME HOLD BRG pE BRG 1 BSS NAV 1 GPS 1 ae ADF EE BRG 2 LL NAV 2 s c GPS 2 EEX ADF L o5 Figure 2 3 PFD Soft Key Diagram The soft keys are located along the bottom of the displays below the soft
293. rope Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 ORB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 444 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Corporation No 68 Zhangshu 2nd Road Xizhi Dist New Taipei City 221 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2642 9199 Fax 886 2 2642 9099 Garmin Singapore Pte Ltd 46 East Coast Road 05 06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel 65 63480378 Fax 65 63480278 www garmin com Part Number 190 00601 02 Rev F
294. rvals defined in the Refresh Rate column If a weather product is not received within the 30 60 90 or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals the data is considered expired and is removed from the display This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM WX Satellite Radio services If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received the color of v the product age displayed changes to yellow 4 9 2 Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map 255 Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually The Wx lt Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the amp Weather Legends The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of the weather products 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT Press the MED knob is return bo bose pe T Figure 4 31 Weather Page Menu Options 4 48 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F GARMIN 2 With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed turn the Large MFD knob to select the desired item and press ENT DATA LINK SETUP Hap Orientotion Marth un HERRAD Dota Virwieg Konp HERRAD Lraend Eche Too Gate Viewing F
295. s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Class B TMA Airspace Viewing Range The Class B TMA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class B TMA c airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class B TMA airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 200 NM is selected Class B TMA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower Figure 3 56 Navigation Map Class B TMA Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Class B TMA Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F m NAVIGATION MAP 2 SETUP Platin SAFETAXI VIEWING RANGE 500i RMWY EXTENSION RANGE OFT IHT WOB VIEWING RANGE 1515 VOR VIEWING RANEE 150NH CLASS E TH HOA MILITARY OTHER ADIZ AIRWAYS Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide Wass 39S ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUEpIOAV piezeH SoJn ea jeuonippy y xipueddy Alesso 5 SJOQUIAS SuUelv 8 2 29g 28g unuuv G 99S Xepul g xipueddy 7 29
296. s in white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before ea effective date The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when expired SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white t gt SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card Expired SateTaxi data is never disabled 1 AW A V Xapu 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 21 J l g aav puad g XIDU 298 32S A GARMIN 5 5 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment NOTE Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM WX Satellite Weather products The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilots and passengers enjoyment The GDL 69A can receive Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U S Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signals from satellites coverage far exceeds land based transmissions Sirius XM Satellite Radio services are subscription based For more information on specific service packages visit http Avww garmin com xm E 5 5 1 Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services The service is activated by providing Sirius XM Satellite Rad
297. s should use discretion when inhibiting Terrain SVT and always remember to enable the system when appropriate gt z T E e a gt SoJn e9J euonipp suay 8 unuuy SJoqu s TER INH Figure 4 26 Terrain SVT Alerting Disabled Alerts Inhibited Annunciation PFD amp MFD Ayesso 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Terrain SVT Page S 2 Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable Terrain SVT choice dependent 3 on current state OR 1 Press the MENU key Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 29 Cn D dm C 298 C 23S C I piezep 7 29 8 295 G 29 9 28S A GARMIN 2 Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight Inhibit Terrain or Enable Terrain choice dependent on current state and press the ENT key 24 6 4 Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations Terrain SVT alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity z level or both When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued When an alert is issued annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD Terrain z amp SVT page only The TAWS Terrain Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD It the Terrain SVT page is not displayed at the time a pop up alert appears on the 5 2 MFD To acknowledge the pop up alert Press
298. s the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic A NOTE TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of aTIS capable terminal radar site Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems TAS and TIS Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data X or climb descent indication A NOTE TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive The type of traffic systems that is installed is determined by the traffic page display in the upper left corner of the MFD If Traffic Information Service TIS is configured TIS will be displayed in the upper left corner of the MFD Traffic Information Service TIS is designed to help in detection and S a avoidance of other aircraft TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link TIS receives traffic information from ground stations and is updated every five seconds The GDU 620 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7 5 NM amp v radius from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft Traffic is 2 5 displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols 4 8 1 Traffic Map Page The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude without clutter trom the basemap Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
299. sition and GPS MSL altitude TAWS displays a 2 D 3 or 3 D with SVT picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions 4 4 4 Baro Corrected Altitude Versus GPS MSL Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The most accurate baro corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude as read from the altimeter to differ from the GPS MSL altitude This variation results in the aircrafts true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude T a re em a gt 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 1 A GARMIN 4 4 5 Using TAWS 5 During G600 power up the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed 5 along with a disclaimer to the pilot
300. ss ENT to accept the displayed value A W 5 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing A NOTE Page Group and Page are shown at the bottom of the MFD Hi EM MIN Page Group Page Turn Large MFD knob Turn Small MFD knob Figure 3 5 Page Group and Page Locator 3 3 3 Selecting Page Options 1 Change the fields or the setup of a page by pressing the MENU key and make gS Oo the necessary adjustments with the MFD knobs 2 Press ENT to accept the displayed value Press the small MFD knob to cancel a selection or to end editing 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 5 A GARMIN 3 3 4 Changing the Navigation Map Range The Range RNG keys on the right side of the bezel are used to change the map display range Pressing the Il RNG key will zoom out increasing the displayed map range and pressing the ud RNG key will zoom in decreasing d the displayed map range The Map Range is shown in the lower right corner of the MFD and represents the top to bottom distance covered by the map The Ma E n map ranges available are from 500 feet to 2000 NM When the map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the GDU 620 to accurately represent the map a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range Map Range Overzoom Icon Map Range Figure 3 6 Map Range 3 3 5 Decluttering Map Pages The Map Declutter feature allows the pilo
301. ss validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 4 3 3 System Status XE The Terrain system continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status Should the system detect a 3 failure a failure message will be displayed pom 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 0 A GARMIN 44 Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS B Optional TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain CFIT TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft The displayed alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only TAWS satisfies TSO C151b Class B requirements for certification Class B TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine passenger seats FAR Parts 91 223 135 154 4 4 1 TAWS B Requirements TAWS requires the following to operate properly e A valid terrain obstacle airport terrain database e A valid 3 D GPS position solution 2 442 TAWS B Limitations WARNING The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross valid
302. t 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the RNG Range GS Gu y to zoom in and out 2 After zooming in you may only see part of the chart Press the small MFD knob to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart Turn the large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart Helv S Unuuy 9 29 5 s sioqu Nl 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning leSso D 8 29 y xipueddy Xapu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 3 NEU Hazard c ES a lt Annun nn r diy D ppendix B A GARMIN 5 1 2 Choosing a Chart for the Current Airport E NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will E automatically be selected 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft 32 key to activate chart selection 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport identifier 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart Nanc A A AGI I CC AVOI ua w El gt 19 lt P LL amp Alerts Figure 5 4 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport ChartView shown AAAs Index 5 4 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart DJOM9JOJ UJ91s g 29S T POE ae Ad ae ao Le es E A iii Ried a
303. t s Guide 4 45 A GARMIN Switching Between TIS Operating Modes 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group and then turn the small MFD knob to the Traffic Map Page 2 Select the STANDBY or OPERATE soft key to switch between modes The mode E is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page OR 1 Press the MENU key zE 2 Select Operate mode or Standby mode whether airborne or on the ground 3 Press the ENT key Forewc NOTE An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air Sec 4 The annunciations indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed 5 te No lt lt Q lditioi Features Sec A Sec Annun Q A tc G Alerts Symbols J B Appendix 4 46 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Traffic Status Banner Description Annunciation A Trattic Advisory is outside the selected display range Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds If after another 6 seconds data is not received traffic is removed from the display The quality of displayed tr
304. t to progressively step through four levels of decluttering to remove map information The declutter level is nes displayed in the DCLTR soft key NAVIGATION MAP 1 ach Y Figure 3 7 Map Declutter Soft Key xx 1 There are four levels of decluttering DCLTR 0 shows the most detail DCLTR 3 removes the most detail z 3 2 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages press the DCLTR soft key Each successive press of the DCLTR soft key will toggle through the declutter levels Features marked with a e are shown at the indicated Declutter Level NOTE Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map pages when the map scale is above 150 NM 3 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F Feature Feature Airways Class D Airspace River Lake Names Land Country Text Large City Medium City Small City Alert Areas Caution Areas 0 2773 0 1 pe EXE EXE NN EN Le e EXE EN EXE pe EN NH EJEA lg REN a a ESEZ Small Town ES nz Danger Areas ENEN Freeways EN Warning Areas ENEN Highways EN EE ENEN Roads EN Loe EMEN pe KAES pe NEN KZE ESETAN E3ES c INE ESEJ Railroads Large Airports Medium Airports Prohibited Areas Political Boundaries Lat Lon Grids Runway Labels VORS Lightning Strike Data Intersections ej e TrafficSymbols Jejeje 39v casBaispae e ees e cascais e Wee e e e t n es 1 lol pDwemus t 1t Table 3 1 Features Shown at Each Decluttering Level 393UPD
305. t value will then be highlighted 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired offset and then press ENT 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 57 A GARMIN ATBNDESTSHS3 5 A52 22LCL Foreword TIME FORMAT TIME OFFSET Sec 1 System Figure 3 74 Date and Time Values Sec 2 PFD 4 A Time Offset may be entered by using the large and small MFD knobs to change the values Press ENT after completing any changes 5 Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments 3 4 1 7 MFD Display Units The MFD Display Units options allow you to select the units of measurement conventions displayed on the MFD Distance and Speed selections are Imperial Metric or Nautical Altitude and Vertical speed selections are Feet or Meters Oc ro qp WOO ns nmr eL lt 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Distance and Speed DIS SPD units of measurement Sec 5 Additional Features HFD DISPLAY UNITS DIS SPD ALT VS Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Figure 3 75 Distance and Speed MFD Display Units Sec 8 Glossary 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Imperial Metric or Nautical and then press ENT The Altitude and Vertical Speed units selection will now be highlighted 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select Feet or Meters and then press ENT Appendix A Appendix
306. tation or large areas of lesser precipitation and may not fully reflect the storm behind the storm e Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80 320 NM range even if these ranges are not being monitored z 4 10 1 1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting and Ranging Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting a microwave pulse beam that upon encountering a target is then reflected back to the radar receiver as a return echo The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna with the most intense energy in the center of the beam and decreasing intensity near 4 80 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN the edge The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the G600 MFD DJ0M9JOJ Radar detection is a two way process that requires 12 36 micro seconds for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out and back for each nautical mile of target range It takes 123 6 micro seconds for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip if a target is 10 NM away UJ91s g The GWX 68 weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather not lor penetrating severe weather The decision to fly into an area of radar targets _ depends on target intensity spacing between the targets aircraft capabilities and pilot experience Pulse type weather ra
307. te ILS frequency must be activate in the navigator 3 Verity that the waypoints for the approach are displayed on the Nav Map Page or the FPL Page of the MFD 4 Upon approaching the tinal course select LOC on the HSI S OQWAS 29 NOTE If auto CDI switching is active on the GNS unit the GNS will force the GNS GDU 620 to NAV when the aircraft is close to the LOC course AJeSSO 8 29S 5 The CDI and course pointer will change trom magenta to green and the pointer will move or slew to the final approach course or 180 from the tinal approach course for LOC BC approaches y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 25 A GARMIN ARITE IT rr oodbor and lor tina sapma tix ODAS MRD AOAO Cab vo 3000 diea RANO LOM n repente bh dee rot noy m Can C 53 he 300 Foreword System U D WY Course Pointer slewed to 0 for the Backcourse CRE TY C3 eR iN Sec 3 M Figure 2 35 Auto Slewing HSI with Localizer Backcourse Loaded and Shown with the Corresponding Approach Plate 2 8 Supplemental Flight Data Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features 2 8 1 Bearing Pointers Two Bearing Pointers can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources The pointers are light blue and are single BRGI or double lined BRG2 an icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer type The system must be configured for a second naviga
308. ted o __ Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower 3 2 qd Minds Aloft Dota Viewing Roran piezep 7 29 gt z T EI e rar injee DOW IOI Figure 4 120 Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range Selection E 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the _ MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT n 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range 3 Turm the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted CCA SSO L 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to 3 the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option x 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 125 A GARMIN Winds Aloft Altitude 2 The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where g Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the _ surface up to 42 000 feet MSL 48 Pressing the WIND DOWN or WIND UP soit keys steps down or up in the 3 000 foot increments In the figure below where 6000 feet is selected Winds _ _ Aloft data will be shown for winds reported at an altitude of 6000 feet Sec 4 S TE N S lt Winds Al
309. th SW version 3 0 Added SVT TAWS B Terrain Proximity Wind Vectors Minimums Bug GAD 43 and Weather Radar o D 11 19 10 Updates for SW Versions 4 00 and 5 00 o E 08 05 11 Updates for SW Version 6 00 F 10 19 12 Updates for SW Version 6 11 33 AOPA Airport Directory AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS INC AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY AOPA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY Z i RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES a THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES USER AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION CLAIMS OR LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMI
310. the area of illumination and the intensity of the displayed target returns A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy 4 84 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN DJOM 310 28S UJ91s g ddd C 298 Figure 4 70 Angle of Incidence 3IN 299 A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display will show a higher intensity Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle the resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain gt lt I A e T 2 e rar 4 10 3 Operating Distance The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near an operating airborne weather radar The minimum sale distance is based upon the FCC exposure limit at 9 3 to 9 5 GHz for general population uncontrolled environments which is 1 mW cm See Advisory Circular 20 68B for more information on sate distance determination E 4 10 3 1 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level MPEL GWX 68 The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW cm is the semicircular area of at least 11 feet from the 12 inch antenna as indicated in the illustration below All personnel must remain outside of this zone With a scanning or rotating bea
311. the energy is absorbed If precipitation is very heavy or covers a large area the signal may not reach completely through the area of precipitation The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an attenuated signal and area of no precipitation If the signal has been fully attenuated the radar will display a radar shadow This appears as an end to the precipitation when in fact the heavy rain may extend much further A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first preventing it from being displayed on the radar Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell The WATCH feature of the GWX 68 Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas Areas in question Symbols IX A pend Cx lt Index 4 82 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN will appear as shadowed or gray area on the radar display Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the 3 radome Even the smallest amount of wear and tear pitting and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency 4 10 2 Radar Signal Reflectivity 4 10 2 1 Precipitation Precipitation or objects more dense than water such as earth or so
312. the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN DTK s ETA CHRT HETAR Figure 3 110 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Change Fields Option Selection 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 79 A 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired data item and press ENT 5 Press the small MFD knob to remove the cursor gt To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Restore Defaults and then press ENT OF TIO PR a a EE HEZLDCY La Preas fhe AR leant to c mb bos en Figure 3 111 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection to Restore Defaults 3 5 1 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts if interfaced to an audio panel when approaching the Selected Altitude Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed the Altitude Alerter is reset The Altitude Alerter is independent of any autopilot installed in the aircraft See the Altitude Alerting section of the PFD section for more details 1 While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group press the Menu key With the Set Minimums item highlighted press ENT 3 2 With the Minimums Source highlighted select the Altitude Minim
313. ther expired or the G600 can not determine the date MINER CEJ Solelox Expires 855 E Am Terran mii m Airport Terroin 2 04 A hsiocle Expires TH HOV PBIT Tv Ekpirae TE Aiii Sh Ant hreet Ekm res Ra Lo CUIU T Chori Yi Dipgobler 0 JAN 2011 Figure A 5 Database Information on the Splash Screen Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then the small MFD knob to reach the System Status Page Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the DATABASE window Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases are current and there are no errors Power down the GDU 620 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN INDEX Altitude trend vector 2 12 Angle of incidence 4 84 Annunciations 1 11 2 13 2 14 2 29 Symbols 4 10 4 17 4 18 4 25 4 30 1 2 key 2 3 4 36 4 37 4 45 4 47 5 12 5 17 6 1 A Answering a phone call 3 77 Above Ground Level 4 12 Antenna stabilization 4 98 Activating XM 5 22 Antenna tilt 4 81 4 83 4 86 4 94 4 98 Active flight plan 2 14 3 1 3 78 3 79 4 101 3 80 Approaches 2 23 2 24 3 89 4 21 5 2 Additional features 5 1 5 4 5 10 5 13 5 16 5 43 8 1 ADF 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 27 8 1 Apt Dir 3 86 ADIZ 3 7 3 12 3 46 AP Test 2 3 s AFF 3 69 APTSIGNS 2 4 zh Age 4 50 Arc 4 5 4 6 4 8 4 13 4 14 4 28 i AHRS iii 1 1 1 4 1 7 1 11 3 56 6 2 Arrivals 5 10 5 16 6 4 6 6 Attitude 1 1 1 4 1 7 1 11 2 8 2 10
314. tical Speed Settings Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug 1 Press the V S key to activate Vertical Speed mode 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Vertical Speed Bug 3 Press the center of the PFD knob to set the Vertical Speed value to the current vertical speed 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 2 17 A GARMIN 2 6 Horizontal Situational Indicator Foreword The Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI displays a rotating compass card in a heading up orientation Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30 Major tick marks are at 10 intervals and minor tick marks at 5 intervals A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI and the current ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond The HSI also presents turn rate course deviation bearing and navigation source information The MSG annunciation will be shown in the HSI when an unacknowledged message is present on the selected navigator When the message is acknowledged the MSG annunciation will clear System U D WY Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts ME 3 69 5 elg RES C Ia Rad um 12 o 6 J 8 5 E O O O 16 Sec 7 Symbols Turn Rate Indicator C Lateral Deviation Scale 2 Course Pointer GPS Level of Service PE 3 Heading Bug 11 To From Indicator 4 Navigation Source 12 Current Track Indicator Aircraft Symbol Turn Rate Heading
315. ting for wind speed and direction relative to gt the three dimensional display 3 5 7 3 2 Zero Pitch Line The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents _ the aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon It is not necessarily aligned with the terrain horizon particularly when the terrain is sloped or mountainous 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 41 A GARMIN 5 7 3 3 Horizon Heading Ihe Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows compass headings in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line Horizon heading tick marks and digits appearing on the zero pitch line are not visible when they are _ behind either the airspeed or altitude display Horizon Heading is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG soft key i Horizon Heading Sec 1 PFD Foreword Sec 2 Sec 3 M Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Figure 5 41 Horizon Heading 5 7 3 4 Airport Signs Airports Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain display When activated the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 NM from an airport and disappear at approximately 4 5 NM Airport signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft is approximately 9 NM from the airport Airport signs are shown behind the airspeed or altitude display Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APT SIGNS soft key
316. tion Altitude Range Rings Information Yellow Terrain Caution _ Terrain Between 100 ft Map Range and 1000 ft Below the Aircraft Altitude DUE wnship Symbo pue f ae n ni at Present Position Within 100 ft Below the Aircraft Altitude Black Terrain No Danger TERRAIN Bee Terrain More than 1000 Lo MET m Pod Se ft Below the Aircraft REON e Pone au Altitude g Page Name 360 120 Inhibit Range Ring Arc TAWS Selection Selection oc Figure 4 11 360 View on the TAWS Page A Ex Changing the TAWS Page View Between 360 and Arc 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page z 2 Press VIEW and then the 360 or ARC soft key to select the desired view OR 1 While viewing the TAWS page press the MENU key 52 Tum the large or small MFD knob to highlight View Arc or View 360 and then press ENT Press tha RED brh n secure dn Dese now Figure 4 12 Select TAWS Display View 360 or Arc 4 14 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Showing Hiding Aviation Information on the TAWS Page 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page 2 Press the MENU key Turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight Show 3 Aviation Data or Hide Aviation Data and then press ENT lv ule1s g C 298 U Figure 4 13 Show Hide Aviation Data C 3IN Manually Testing the TAWS System 1 Select the TAWS page 2 Press the MENU key and th
317. tion source to show the BRG2 selection Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols When a Bearing Pointer is displayed its associated information window is also displayed Sec 8 Glossary The Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show Bearing source GPS NAV or ADF Pointer icon BRGI single line BRG2 double line The Bearing Pointer is removed from the HST if Appendix A Index The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station Appendix B The NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency 2 26 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected e ADF is selected and a signal is not received if you have an ADF that supports a valid flag then the bearing pointer will be removed If your ADF system does not include a valid flag then the bearing pointer will still be displayed regardless of ADF signal validity DJOM9JOJ 29 cn lt MN st MD 3 Bearing 2 Pointer mE GPS Level Current Navigation Source of Service Bearing 1 Pointer CDI zy Bearing 1 Source 3 Bearing 2 Source Bearing 1 Bearing 2 Pointer Icon Pointer Icon Sz 7 Figure 2 36 HSI with Bearing Information EE OCN ENR Seu TERM Ein GPS1 n es Bs LNAV V VOR1 m e mo VOR2 pee LNAV VNAV tam LOCI IP EOCZ MSG OBS 3K LOI SUSP S aT Figure 2 37 PFD HSI Annunciations N 1 Press the PFD soft key to d
318. trical busses The GDU 620 and supporting sub systems include both power on and continuous built in test features that exercise the processor memory external inputs and outputs to ensure safe operation During system initialization test annunciations are displayed All system B annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after power _ up Upon power up bezel key backlights also become momentarily illuminated on the GDU 620 display bezel D On the PFD the AHRS begins to initialize and AHRS ALIGN Keep Wings _ Level is displayed The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute after power up The AHRS can align itself both while taxiing and during level flight A NOTE Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary 5 and with all AHRS inputs valid 3 D GPS position magnetometer and air data During initial power up on the ground no GPS position and or _ magnetic anomalies are common If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS lt alignment alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3 D GPS position is available A NOTE During in flight alignment of the AHRS minimize aircraft maneuvering The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch AHRS alignment may not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers i 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s
319. ts whether Class D airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class D airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 150 NM is selected Class D airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower IHT hDB VIEWING RANGE Figure 3 58 Navigation Map Class D Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Class D Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 43 o ploMad 29S Wass ddd C 298 adi 99 eDUepIOAV piezeH y 29 sainyee4 PUOTIPPY JeSSO E sioqu S SH Y 8 Q 29S aS unuuy 9 288 G 299 y xipueddy Xepul g xipueddy A GARMIN Restricted Airspace Viewing Range The Restricted airspace viewing range option selects whether the map range is shown on the Navigation Map Restricted airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 200 NM is sel
320. turn the small MFD knob to the third Navigation Map page plOMa UJa1s g 29S Current Video Source C 298 Display of External Video Source Ceo TRACK UP aS TFR S d cw D m e s ce D Map Display SoJn eo euonippy G 99S Say 9 unuuv 9 298 Figure 3 64 External Video 2 The External Video page will show the external video on the top half of the MFD and a Navigation Map will be shown on the lower half sioquJ S LS 3 To select the other external video source press the MENU key PE ney ieSso D 8 299 I Oo Oo Selected Video Source 3 Press the AED knob to meiu to bose B gt I O s 5 Figure 3 65 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu o 2 x 4 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Video selection and then press ENT 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 49 GARMIN 3 4 Aux Mode Pages The Aux mode provides pages for System Setup XM Information it installed and system Status 3 4 1 System Settings G600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page The following settings can be changed Display Brightness Mode and Level e Airspeeds Glide REE V V V1 and V V2 PFD Options Wind Vector and Nav Status Styles Dual Unit Synchronization CDI and Baro Date Time Date Time Time Format and Time Offset MFD Display Units Distance Speed and Altitude Vertical Speed e System Displa
321. ughout most of Europe Canada and the U S Additional radar _ coverage areas are being added continuously CY EX 7 oS A More detail on GFDS weather products and coverage can be found at http fly garmin com fly garmin gids weather e NOTE A system can be configured for both XM and GFDS but both cannot be displayed a the same time WARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Display GFDS Weather option Press ENT This setting will affect the display of data link weather on the map pages as well as the Wx pages 4 102 Press the HFD knob to return to bose poge Figure 4 91 Select GFDS Weather Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 2 Select XM Weather by
322. ums Alerter source with small MFD knob Figure 3 112 Minimums Source Selection 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value Turn the large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value SOLIRCE DARL ALTITUDE amp Figure 3 113 Minimums Altitude Selection 3 80 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 Press ENT to activate the selected value In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units DJOM9JOJ NOTE If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and press the CLR key it will turn the minimums functionality off Ul91s g 29S 3 5 2 Waypoint Information Page The Waypoint Information page provides details about a particular waypoint You can show a waypoint by selecting it by Ident Facility Name or by City The Map window shows the selected waypoint in the center of the map The Range keys zoom in and out on the map The Info window at the bottom of the display shows the Bearing and Distance from your present position to the selected Bi waypoint as well as its region and Lat Lon coordinates The map window is set up with the same parameters as were selected for Navigation Map Page 1 TO O C 298 BDURPIOAY pJezeH V 22S Facility Identifier cer Facility Type Facility Name Facility Location E Map Orientation gor TA 2218
323. ums Altitude Selection Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft 5 5 reaches 150 feet above the MDA The Minimum altitude will be available in the lt Altitude Alerter In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from gt amp either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units NOTE If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and press the CLR key it will turn the minimums functionality off 5 8 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 1 5 2 Viewing Chart NOTAMs If an active NOTAM Notice to Airmen exists for the selected chart the NOTAM soit key will be available Press the NOTAM soft key to view the NOTAM or select View NOTAMs from the Chart Options Menu T HOTANS Press the ENT key to return to the bose poge Figure 5 11 Chart NOTAM 5 1 5 3 Day Night View The Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background for day or Tl t te e a n euonippy g 295 night viewing The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment x The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the GDU 620 soft keys are blank 1 Inthe FPL page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Charts page 2 Press MENU to display the Options menu IB o2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Day Auto Nig
324. unless there is 7 no valid heading The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map 2 Page When the aircraft is on the ground TIS automatically enters Standby Mode Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches from Standby to Operating Mode and the GDU 620 begins to display traffic information 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 4 39 A GARMIN Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to select the Map Page Group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Traffic Map Page 3 Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode Select the OPERATE soft key to begin displaying traffic OR 1 Press the MENU key 2 Select Operate Mode shown if TIS is in Standby Mode and then press the ENT Iraffic Advisory Aircraft is 1200 feet above climbing and moving away Sec4 5 o 2 No lt Proximity Advisory Aircraft is 5000 feet below descending and moving away Figure 4 30 Traffic Map Page TIS 4 40 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 8 2 TIS Symbology TIS Symbol Description Non Threat Traffic gt Intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1200 feet vertical separation Proximity Advisory PA Intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1200 feet vertical separation Traffic Advisory TA Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria ry Traffic Advisory Off Scale Table 4 16 TIS Traffic Sy
325. ure 29 92 in 1013 mb and the previously selected value 1 4 1 3 MFD Knobs The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD pages More details are provided in the MFD section Small Inner MFD Knob sr Selects a specific page within a page group Pressing the small MFD knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFF When the cursor is ON data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large MFD knobs In this case the large MFD knob moves the cursor on the page and the small MED knob selects individual characters or values for the highlighted cursor location Large Outer MFD Knob Selects the MFD page group When the cursor is ON the large MFD knob _ moves the cursor to highlight available fields a 1 4 1 4 MFD Bezel Keys Range RNG Ec Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the Map pages The Up arrow zooms out The Down arrow zooms in The keys also aid in scrolling up and down text pages 3 Menu Displays a context sensitive list of options This list allows the user to access _ additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages Enter ENT Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry Clear CLR Erases information cancels entries or removes page menus Pressing and holding the CLR key displays the Navigation Map 1 page z7 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 17 A GARMIN 1 4 2 Using the
326. ured by the installer to optimize display appearance through fai a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures Backlighting Adjustment 1 From the first AUX page press the small MFD knob to highlight the DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS MODE box Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired brightness Level and then press ENTER NO x DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Manual Adjustment 0 1 to 50 or Auto 1 7 Auto or Manual Figure 1 23 Display Brightness Adjustment 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MODE field Turn the small MFD knob to select AUTO or MANUAL 4 Press ENT 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 123 GARMIN pJ0M3JOJ ddd C 29 di 298 eDUPpIOAV pJezeH V 295 This page intentionally left blank SaJnjeaJ euonippy G 29 S Y 9 uhuuv 9 295 sioqui g L 298 Alesso 5 8 29 y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 1 24 A GARMIN 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY PFD Functions on the PFD are accessed by using the bezel keys on the side of the PFD and the soft keys below the PFD Horizon Slip Skid Roll Scale Roll Line Indicator Zero Pointer DJOM9JOJ cn WN 48 T Nav Status Bar Altitude Tape Air Speed Tape PFD Knob Mode Indicator Current Wind Vectors Baromet
327. utopilot installations support arming and disarming of the selected altitude using the ALT key on the PFD The PFD knob window will 5 indicate when this function is available The selected altitude may be alternately armed or disarmed by pressing and holding the ALT key on the PFD bezel HOLD HOLD E TO DISARH 2 PC ine z E Figure 5 29 Pressing and Holding the ALT Key to Arm Disarm the Selected Altitude 5 32 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 5 6 4 Autopilot Navigation The HSI may be used in conjunction with the appropriate navigation modes of supported autopilots The GDU 620 provides the autopilot with the selected course and lateral vertical deviations The GDU 620 acts as a switching source between the installed navigation sources e g GPS VLOC 1 2 The navigation o source that is displayed on the HSI is sent to the autopilot Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot navigation functions GPS Steering GPSS provides roll command signals calculated by the GPS navigator to the autopilot in order to allow the aircraft to anticipate turns make smooth transitions when passing waypoints and fly leg types such as Procedure Turns and Holding Patterns The autopilot must have the ability to interpret the 3 7 GPSS commands The G600 can provide GPSS information to autopilots that have built in support for GPS
328. v F A GARMIN 4 8 5 TIS System Status The GDU 620 performs an automatic test of TIS during power up If TIS passes the test TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating Mode in the air If TIS fails the power up test an annunciation is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page Traffic Map Page Annunciation Description Data is not being received trom the transponder Data is being received from the transponder but a failure is detected in the data stream The transponder has failed TIS is unavailable or out of range Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action Table 4 17 TIS Failure Annunciations pJezey Y 29 gt z e T E e a gt The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page When the aircraft is on the ground TIS automatically enters Standby Mode If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby Mode is selected the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out also the case when TIS has failed Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed The mode can be changed manually using soft keys or the page menu Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Display Enabled Icon Mode Traffic ETO Page Other Maps TIS Operating OPERATING STANDBY TIS Standby INTR TRE RESET SU page TIS Failed FAIL Table 4 18 TIS Modes 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilo
329. venience of rapid access to essential information Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the system but not both Tl t te e ge 72 Jeuonippy SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway runway and ramp information gt at more than 700 airports in the United States By decreasing the range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available a close up view of the airport layout can be seen T The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music news _ and sports Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and g longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations XM WX Satellite Weather is an optional service that provides the ability to gt display graphic weather data overlaid on the MFD Nav Map and Weather Data Link pages The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS or TIS traffic data in relationto the aircrafts current position and altitude The Traffic option is designed to assist gt in detection and avoidance of other aircraft 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 5 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 c 5 c lt Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A GARMIN The optional Synthetic Vision Technology SVI is a visual enhancement to the G600 SVT is displayed as a forward looking
330. vice contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in 3 locating a Service Center near you visit the Garmin web site at http www garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 866 739 5687 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide E E i CD E i Taf A GARMIN WARNING Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function The GDU 620 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system Terrain TAWS data is obtained from third party sources Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data WARNING The displayed minimum safe altitudes MSAs are only advisory in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes WARNING The Garmin GDU 620 has a very high degree of functional integrity However the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and or self test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical Although unlikely it may be possi
331. wnship i m i 07 ee 8 v B MFD Wind Vector w valid GPS solution PFD Wind Vector styles Parallel Track Waypoint Restricted Prohibited Warning Alert TFR Temporary Flight Restrictions o Class B Airspace Class C Airspace Class D Airspace User Waypoint Table 7 7 Miscellaneous Symbols 1 6 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 8 GLOSSARY ACT ACTV active activate E ADC Air Data Computer z ADF Automatic Direction Finder ADI Attitude Direction Indicator AFF Automatic Flight Following E AFM Airplane Flight Manual AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement AGL Above Ground Level AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System AIM Airman s Information Manual AIRMET Airman s Meteorological Information u ALT altitude 5 AP autopilot APR approach APT airport aerodrome ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated ARSPC airspace ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center LEG AS airspeed SEA ASOS Automated Surface Observing System d ATC Air Traffic Control ATCRBS ATC Radar Beacon System aw ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service 256 AUX auxiliary AWOS Automated Weather Observing System BARO barometric setting BC backcourse Bearing The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint BRG bearing C center runway s degrees Celsius CDI Course Deviation Indicator CHNL channel CLD cloud _s CLR clear 2 CONFIG configuration 190
332. y A 2 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN 4 A notice on the display will indicate successful updating of the database Figure A 2 Database Loading Completed 5 The following display will show the databases and their current status y Bosenop Lond 4 08 n i5ofeloxi Expires 18 HOV 2010 Terrain 2 04 Airport Terrain 2 04 A Obstocle Expires 18 NOV 2018 Fgtion Expires 18 HOV 2B T8 gt Apt Directory Expires 18 HOV 2010 oy ChartVies Disobles 2H JAN 2A11 All noe and D TRAded is alv to be Had a J reference Ep yar arroda and im oan aid d Ws Figure A 3 Database Information on the Splash Screen 6 Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then small MFD knob to reach the System Status Page 7 Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the DATABASE window 8 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases are current and there are no errors If a database is highlighted in yellow it is either expired or the G600 can not determine the date 9 Power down the GDU 620 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide A 3 A GARMIN Garmin Databases 2 WARNING The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases lt aos 5 c D 2 2 lt comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The following GDU
333. y G 299 AIRWAVES su Jy 9 unuuy 9 39S Figure 3 60 Navigation Map MOA Military Viewing Range Selection 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MOA Military Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value sioquJ S L 298 leSso D 8 29S 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option y xipueddy Xepul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 45 A GARMIN Other ADIZ Airspace Viewing Range The Other ADIZ airspace viewing range option selects whether Other ADIZ airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Other ADIZ airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown In the example below where 200 NM is selected Other ADIZ airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 200 NM and lower System Foreword Sec 1 Sec 2 PFD OD a n Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance OTHER ADT Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 3 61 Navigation Map Other ADIZ Viewing mer Selection Sec 7 Symbols While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Aviation Group act
334. y Units Navigation Angle Reference Pressure Units and Temperature Units DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS DATE TIHE LEVEL 1 64 DATE 13 M R 12 HODE AUTO TIME 18 16 51LCL TIME FORMAT LOCAL 24he r AIRSPEEDS PFD g ON TIME OFFSET gis GLIDE 88k Vr OKT 40N HFD DISPLAY UNITS kT ON DIS SPD NMAUTICALHMKT SEK ON ALT VS FEET FT FPH PFD OPTIONS SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS WIND VECTOR STYLE 2 N V ANGLE MAGNETIC NAV STATUS STYLE 2 PRESS INCHESKIN B CELSIUSCC SYNCHRONIZATION OFF OW SYSTEH SETUP HAP WX ALK FPL OB OOOO DFLT UNIT RA TEST DFLT SPD ADVISORY Figure 3 66 Aux Mode System Setup Page 3 50 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN The default values set by the installer during installation are restored by using the Page Menu options or soft keys The Restore Unit Defaults menu selection and the DFLT UNIT soft key restores the default MFD Display and System Display Units settings The Restore Airspeed Defaults menu selection or DFLT SPD soft key restores the default PFD Airspeeds settings The RA TEST soft key activates the Radar Altimeter test mode See the Radio Altimeter section in Section 2 for details A NOTE Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function 1 While viewing the Aux mode System Setup page press the MENU key Fate MEHL TE Ge ae Pit REL DE ae Lee Press tha AFD one n retara t ban cox Figure 3
335. y be available for use when the SD card is in the bottom slot The Phone Book may hold up to 128 entries A phone number may be entered and dialed without saving it to the Phone Book Note that it is necessary to dial a 1 the area code and then the number Creating Phone Number Names e 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Iridium Phone page Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Name item in the Phone Book The Name field will blink If items already exist in the catalog turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon Then turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the New Entry selection and press ENT PHONEBOOK MAME GARMIN AT PHONE NUMBER New Entry Selected for T TESTS Phone Book Catalog Entry Figure 3 96 New Entry Selected for Phone Book Catalog Entry 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the name and then turn the large MFD knob to select the next character When the name is complete press the ENT key IRIDIUM PHONE STATUS CALL TIME PHONE STATUS CALL SUPPRESSION PHONEBOOK Phone Book Entry Name Catalog PHONE NLIHBER Figure 3 97 Phone Book Name Entry 3 72 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Creating Phone Numbers with the Rotary Knobs 1 Turn the large MFD
336. y changes to the Barometric Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs Crossfill synchronization for CDI and Baro Corrections are selected in Aux mode 1 While viewing the first page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight CDI or BARO in the Synchronization box in both units SYNCHRONIZATION Figure 3 72 Dual Unit Synchronization 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF 3 Press ENT The following information is always synchronized between both GDU 620 3 5 units e Selected Altitude e Selected Heading e Selected Course e Selected Vertical Speed Airspeed Bug Values Airspeed Color Band Values e System Pressure Units e System Temperature Units 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 3 55 A GARMIN The following information can be synchronized between GDU 620s or changed independently depending on the Crosshill Synchronization Settings Z e Barometric Correction default ON Selected CDI default OFF When Barometric Correction is synchronized any changes to the Barometric Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs When the CDI is synchronized any changes to the selected CDI on either z GDU will change it on both GDUs Either pilot can change the OBS course on either GNS If the pilot selects GPS1 on the CDI and GNS1 is in OBS mode any course changes will move the OBS on GNS
337. ymbology Terrain Color Terrain Obstacle Location Alert Level Terrain Obstacle at or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude WARNING E Red Terrain Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below current aircraft altitude CAUTION L o Yellow B C JULPplvny pJezeH V 22 The TAWS Page is specialized to show terrain obstacle and potential impact point data in relation to the aircrafts current altitude without clutter trom the basemap Aviation data airports VORs and other NAVAIDs can be displayed O unuuv J ISS for reference If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on o the TAWS Page Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading If orientation is not heading up it will be track up Two views are o available relative to the position of the aircraft the 360 default display and the 5 s JIN radar like ARC 120 display Map range is adjustable with the RNG keys from 1 to 200 NM as indicated by the map range rings or arcs 190 00601 02 Rev F Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 7 Xipuaddy 4 13 A GARMIN Displaying TAWS Information 2 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page 2 Press the RNG keys to display a larger or smaller area Nord Map Orientation orth Indica
338. ystem There are variations in performance and control among the various 5 G600 compatible TAS systems Refer to the appropriate TAS documentation for detailed information on the operation of the TAS system This section describes the display and control functions available on the G600 system LES A NOTE TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive A NOTE Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems TAS and TIS Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication Sec 4 NOTE Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD 5 o g No lt g 44 1 Displaying and Operating Traffic ERE TAS Systems The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to s the aircrafts current position and altitude without basemap clutter Aircraft 3 orientation is always heading up unless no valid heading is received The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner 4 32 Garmin G600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev F A GARMIN Operating OPERATII Mode WRESTI Range Ring Diameter Traffic Advisory Ownship Aircraft is 1200 ft Symbol Above and Climbing Non Threat Traffic Proximity Advisory 1200 ft Above and Climbing Traffic Advisory Off Scale Aircraft is Out of Range 1200 ft Above and Climbing TRAFFIC AAP Non Bearing Traffic System is

Garmin Non_Airframe Specific Pilot's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents